Corolla hatchback hybrid (2017) - Car TOYOTA - Free user manual and instructions

Product Type	Car
Brand	Toyota
Model	Corolla Hatchback Hybrid (2017)
Fuel Type	Unleaded gasoline
Fuel Tank Capacity	45 L (11.9 gal., 9.9 Imp. gal.)
Engine Type	Gasoline engine + electric motor (traction motor)
High Voltage System	Approx. 650 V maximum
Transmission	Hybrid transmission (CVT-like)
Seating Capacity	5
Dimensions (approx.)	Length: 4370 mm, Width: 1790 mm, Height: 1435 mm
Weight (approx.)	1280 - 1380 kg
Tire Size	195/65R15 or 225/45R17 (see manual)
Key Safety Features	SRS airbags (front, side, curtain, knee), ABS, VSC, TRC, Toyota Safety Sense (PCS, LDA, AHB)
Child Restraint System	ISOFIX anchors, top tether anchors, seat belt installation
Audio System	Radio, CD, USB, AUX, Bluetooth, steering wheel controls
Air Conditioning	Automatic climate control
Maintenance	Do-it-yourself checks (oil, coolant, tires, lights, fuses), regular dealer service
Battery (12V)	Lead-acid, located in engine compartment
Traction Battery	Hybrid battery (Li-ion or Ni-MH), under rear seats, maintenance-free
Emergency Equipment	Spare tire, jack, tool kit, warning triangle
Warranty	Refer to separate warranty booklet

Frequently Asked Questions - Corolla hatchback hybrid (2017) TOYOTA

How do I start the hybrid system?

Make sure the electronic key is inside the vehicle. Press the brake pedal firmly and press the Power switch. The READY indicator will illuminate. If the system does not start, check that the shift position is in P.

What is the EV drive mode and how do I use it?

EV drive mode allows the vehicle to operate using only the electric motor. Press the EV drive mode switch to activate. It is available when the hybrid battery is sufficiently charged and certain conditions are met (e.g., low speed, gentle acceleration). The EV indicator lights up when active.

How do I check the hybrid battery level?

The hybrid battery charge level is displayed on the multi-information display. You can also view the energy monitor/consumption screen for detailed power flow. The battery level is shown in bars.

What should I do if a warning light comes on?

If a warning light or message appears, check the multi-information display for details. Refer to the manual’s troubleshooting section. Common actions include stopping the vehicle safely, checking fluid levels, or contacting a Toyota dealer.

How do I install a child restraint system?

Use either the seat belt (with locking clip) or the ISOFIX rigid anchors for rear outboard seats. For forward-facing seats, also attach the upper anchorage strap to the anchor fitting. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

Can I tow a trailer with this vehicle?

Toyota does not recommend trailer towing with this model. The manual states that trailer towing is not covered under warranty due to potential damage. Refer to the driving section for more information.

How do I connect my phone via Bluetooth?

First, ensure your phone is discoverable. On the audio system, go to Setup > Bluetooth and select Add Device. Follow the prompts to pair. You may need to confirm a PIN. The system supports phone calls and audio streaming.

What is the correct tire pressure?

The recommended cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver’s door jamb label and in the specifications section. Typical values are around 230 kPa (33 psi) for front and rear. Adjust based on load and driving conditions.

How do I replace a flat tire?

Park on a level surface, apply parking brake, and place wheel chocks. Use the jack and spare tire from the luggage compartment. Follow the steps in the manual: loosen lug nuts, raise vehicle, remove flat, mount spare, tighten nuts, lower vehicle, and torque to specification.

What maintenance is required for the hybrid battery cooling vent?

The hybrid battery air intake vent is located on the lower left side of the rear seat. Keep it free from obstructions. If a warning message appears, have the filter cleaned or replaced by a Toyota dealer. Regular cleaning prevents overheating.

USER MANUAL Corolla hatchback hybrid (2017) TOYOTA

Owner's Manual

For your safety and comfort, read carefully and keep in the vehicle.

COROLLA

HATCHBACK

HYBRID

Not for Reproduction

©2016 TOYOTA MOTOR CORPORATION

All rights reserved. This material may not be reproduced or copied, in whole or in part, without the written permission of Toyota Motor Corporation.

Pictorial index

Search by illustration

For safety and security

Make sure to read through them

Instrument cluster

How to read the gauges and meters, the variety of warning lights and indicators, etc.

Operation of each component

Opening and closing the doors and windows, adjustment before driving, etc.

Driving

Operations and advice which are necessary for driving

Audio system

Operating the audio system

Interior features

Usage of the interior features, etc.

Maintenance and care

Caring for your vehicle and maintenance procedures

When trouble arises

What to do in case of malfunction or emergency

Vehicle specifications

Vehicle specifications, customizable features, etc.

Index

Search by symptom

Search alphabetically

For your information ....8

Reading this manual....14

How to search ....15

Pictorial index......16

1 For safety and security

1-1. For safe use

Before driving....26

For safety drive....28

Seat belts....30

SRS airbags....34

Safety information for children....44

Child restraint systems .....45

Installing child restraints....53

Exhaust gas precautions....63

1-2. Hybrid system

Hybrid system features......64

Hybrid system precautions....68

1-3. Theft deterrent system

Immobilizer system....75

2 Instrument cluster

2. Instrument cluster

Warning lights and indicators.... 78

Gauges and meters...... 82

Multi-information display....84

Energy monitor/consumption screen.... 91

3 Operation of each component

3-1. Key information

Keys 98

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Side doors.... 101

Back door.... 105

Smart entry & start system.... 110

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Front seats 117

Rear seats.... 119

Head restraints.... 121

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

Steering wheel 123

Inside rear view mirror..... 125

Outside rear view mirrors.... 126

3-5. Opening and closing the windows

Power windows 128

4 Driving

4-1. Before driving

Driving the vehicle .....132

Cargo and luggage .....140

Trailer towing 141

4-2. Driving procedures

Power (ignition) switch.....142

EV drive mode 147

Hybrid transmission .....149

Turn signal lever 157

Parking brake....158

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Headlight switch....159

Fog light switch....163

Windshield wipers and washer....164

Rear window wiper and washer....166

4-4. Refueling

Opening the fuel tank cap....168

4-5. Toyota Safety Sense

Toyota Safety Sense .....171

PCS (Pre-Collision System) 177

LDA (Lane Departure Alert)....190

Automatic High Beam......195

4-6. Using the driving support systems

Cruise control...... 199

Rear view monitor system.... 202

Driving assist systems..... 211

4-7. Driving tips

Hybrid vehicle driving tips.... 217

Winter driving tips...... 220

5 Audio system

5-1. Using the audio system

Audio system types...... 226

5-2. Basic Operations

Audio system.... 227

Steering wheel audio switches 230

USB/AUX port 231

Basic audio operations..... 232

5-3. Setup

Setup menu.... 234

General settings...... 235

Audio settings...... 237

Display settings.... 238

5-4. Using the audio system

Selecting the audio source....240

List screen operation .....241

Optimal use of the audio system ....243

5-5. Using the radio

Radio operation .....245

5-6. Playing an audio CD and MP3/WMA discs

CD player operation......247

5-7. Using an external device

Listening to an iPod .....254

Listening to a USB memory device ....260

Using the AUX port......266

5-8. Connecting Bluetooth®

Preparations to use wireless communication ....267

Registering a Bluetooth® audio player for the first time....270

Registering a Bluetooth ^® phone for the first time....271

Registering a Bluetooth ^® device .....272

Connecting a Bluetooth ^® device .....275

Displaying a Bluetooth ^® device details.....277

Detailed Bluetooth ^® system settings.....279

5-9. Bluetooth® Audio

Listening to Bluetooth ^® audio 281

5-10. Bluetooth ^® Phone

Using a Bluetooth ^® phone..... 283

Making a call 285

Receiving a call.... 290

Speaking on the telephone 291

Bluetooth ^® phone message function.... 295

Using the steering wheel switches.... 299

Bluetooth® phone settings.... 300

5-11. Contact

Contact/Call history settings.... 302

5-12. Bluetooth®

What to do if... (Troubleshooting)...... 311

Bluetooth ^® 315

6 Interior features

6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Automatic air conditioning system......322

6-2. Using the interior lights

Interior lights list......330

• Interior lights......331
  • Vanity lights......331
  • Personal lights......332

6-3. Using the storage features

List of storage features......334

• Glove box ....335
- Console box ....335
- Bottle holders ....336
• Cup holders......337
• Auxiliary boxes .....338

Luggage compartment features....339

6-4. Other interior features

Other interior features.....343

• Sun visors......343
• Vanity mirrors .....343
- Clock 344
• Power outlets......345
- Armrest......346
- Assist grips......346

7 Maintenance and care

7-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior...... 348

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior...... 351

7-2. Maintenance

Maintenance requirements.... 354

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Do-it-yourself service precautions .... 356

Hood 358

Positioning a floor jack ..... 360

Engine compartment...... 361

12-volt battery 368

Tires 372

Tire inflation pressure...... 375

Wheels 377

Air conditioning filter...... 379

Electronic key battery...... 381

Checking and replacing fuses 383

Light bulbs.... 387

8 When trouble arises

8-1. Essential information

Emergency flashers......398

If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency....399

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If your vehicle needs to be towed....400

If you think something is wrong ....405

If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds ....406

If a warning message is displayed....411

If you have a flat tire .....419

If the hybrid system will not start....429

If the electronic key does not operate properly....431

If the 12-volt battery is discharged ....433

If your vehicle overheats....438

If the vehicle becomes stuck ....442

9 Vehicle specifications

9-1. Specifications

Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)...... 446

Fuel information 456

9-2. Customization

Customizable features ..... 457

Index

What to do if... (Troubleshooting) 464

Alphabetical index...... 468

Not for Reproduction 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

For your information

Main Owner's Manual

Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle.

All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of the Toyota policy of continual product improvement, we reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.

Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustrations may differ from your vehicle in terms of equipment.

Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Toyota

A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for Toyota vehicles are currently available in the market. Using these spare parts and accessories which are not genuine Toyota products may adversely affect the safety of your vehicle, even though these parts may be approved by certain authorities in your country. Toyota Motor Corporation therefore cannot accept any liability or guarantee spare parts and accessories which are not genuine Toyota products, nor for replacement or installation involving such parts.

This vehicle should not be modified with non-genuine Toyota products. Modification with non-genuine Toyota products could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from the modification may not be covered under warranty.

Installation of an RF-transmitter system

The installation of an RF-transmitter system in your vehicle could affect electronic systems such as:

●Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system
● Cruise control system
●Anti-lock brake system
●SRS airbag system
- Seat belt pretensioner system
●Toyota Safety Sense (if equipped)

Be sure to check with your Toyota dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions regarding installation of an RF-transmitter system.

Further information regarding frequency bands, power levels, antenna positions and installation provisions for the installation of RF-transmitters, is available on request at your Toyota dealer.

High voltage parts and cables on the hybrid vehicles emit approximately the same amount of electromagnetic waves as the conventional gasoline powered vehicles or home electronic appliances despite of their electromagnetic shielding.

Unwanted noise may occur in the reception of the radio frequency transmitter (RF-transmitter).

Vehicle data recordings

Your Toyota is equipped with several sophisticated computers that will record certain data, such as:

• Engine speed
  • Electric motor speed (traction motor speed)
• Accelerator status
• Brake status
• Vehicle speed
• Shift position
• Hybrid battery (traction battery) status

The recorded data varies according to the vehicle grade level and options with which it is equipped. Furthermore, these computers do not record conversations, sounds or pictures.

● Data usage

Toyota may use the data recorded in these computers to diagnose malfunctions, conduct research and development, and improve quality.

Toyota will not disclose the recorded data to a third party except:

• With the consent of the vehicle owner or with the consent of the lessee if the vehicle is leased
• In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a government agency
• For use by Toyota in a lawsuit
• For research purposes where the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner

Event data recorder

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. However, data may not be recorded depending on the severity and type of a crash.

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:

• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
  • How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.

NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

● Disclosure of the EDR data

Toyota will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party except when:

• An agreement from the vehicle's owner (or the lessee for a leased vehicle) is obtained
• In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a government agency
• For use by Toyota in a lawsuit

However, if necessary, Toyota may:

- Use the data for research on vehicle safety performance

- Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without disclosing information about the specific vehicle or vehicle owner

Scrapping of your Toyota

The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Toyota contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt pretensioners left as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner removed and disposed of by a qualified service shop or by your Toyota dealer before you scrap your vehicle.

WARNING

■General precautions while driving

Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influence of alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehicle. Alcohol and certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and reduce coordination, which could lead to an accident that could result in death or serious injury.

Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other drivers or pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents.

Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that distracts the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or reading can result in a collision with resulting death or serious injury to you, your occupants or others.

■General precaution regarding children's safety

Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or use the key.

Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with the windows or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children.

Not for Reproduction

Reading this manual

WARNING:

Explains something that, if not obeyed, could cause death or serious injury to people.

NOTICE:

Explains something that, if not obeyed, could cause damage to or a malfunction in the vehicle or its equipment.

1 2 3 ...

Indicates operating or working procedures. Follow the steps in numerical order.

Indicates the action (pushing, turning, etc.) used to operate switches and other devices.

Indicates the outcome of an operation (e.g. a lid opens).

Interior view of a car dashboard with a highlighted seat and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

Indicates the component or position being explained.

Means "Do not", "Do not do this", or "Do not let this happen".

How to search

■ Searching by name

• Alphabetical index..... P. 468

■ Searching by installation position

- Pictorial index...... P. 16

Illustration of a person using an autonomous driving app with a book and thought bubble, no text or symbols present

■ Searching by symptom or sound

• What to do if... (Troubleshooting) ..... P. 464

Illustration of a person reading a book with a lightbulb symbol above, next to a car with lightning bolts (no text or symbols on the car or background)

■ Searching by title

• Table of contents..... P. 2

Illustration of a person reading an open book with a lightbulb above, symbolizing ideas or learning (no text or symbols present)

Pictorial index

Exterior

① Doors P. 101

Locking/unlocking P. 101

Opening/closing the side windows P. 128

Locking/unlocking using the mechanical key.....P. 431

Warning messages P. 411

② Back door....P. 105

Locking/unlocking P. 105

Warning messages P. 411

③ Outside rear view mirrors. P. 126

Adjusting the mirror angle P. 126

Folding the mirrors. P. 126

④ Windshield wipers....P. 164

Precautions for winter P. 220

⑤ Fuel filler door....P. 168

Refueling method P. 168

Fuel type/fuel tank capacity.... P. 448

⑥ Tires....P. 372

Tire size/inflation pressure. P. 454

Winter tires/tire chains. P. 220

Checking/rotation. P. 372

Coping with flat tires P. 419

⑦ Hood P. 358

Opening. P. 358

Engine oil....P. 449

Coping with overheating P. 438

Light bulbs of the exterior lights for driving

(Replacing method: P. 387, Watts: P. 455)

⑧ Headlights/front position lights/daytime running lights/turn signal lights P. 157, 159

⑨ Front fog lights ^* P. 163

⑩ Stop lights/tail lights/turn signal lights ..... P. 157, 159

⑪ License plate lights P. 159

⑫ Tail lights P. 159

Back-up light

Changing the shift position to R. P. 149

Instrument panel

① Power switch P. 142

Starting the hybrid system/changing the modes ..... P. 142

Emergency stop of the hybrid system ..... P. 399

When the hybrid system will not start P. 429

Warning messages P. 411

Precautions against towing P. 400

③ Meters. P. 82

Reading the meters/adjusting the meter light . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 82

Warning lights/indicator lights P. 78

When the warning lights come on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 406

④ Multi-information display P. 84

If a warning message or indicator is displayed.... P. 411

⑤ Parking brake....P. 158

Applying/releasing P. 158

Precautions for winter P. 221

Warning buzzer/message P. 158

⑥ Turn signal lever....P.157

Headlight switch P. 159

Headlights/front position lights/tail lights/daytime running lights P. 159

Front fog lights ^*1 P. 163

⑦ Windshield wiper and washer switch....P. 164

Usage P. 164

Adding washer fluid P. 367

Headlight cleaners....P. 164

⑧ Emergency flasher switch P. 398

⑨ Hood lock release lever P. 358

⑩ Tilt and telescopic steering lock release lever ..... P. 123

Adjustment. P. 123

⑪ Air conditioning system....P. 322

Usage P. 322

Rear window defogger....P. 325

⑫ Audio system*1 P. 226

Navigation/multimedia system ^*1,2

Energy monitor/trip information/past record ..... P. 91

Switches

① PCS (Pre-Collision System) switch ^*1 P. 177
② Outside rear view mirror switches. P. 126
③ Window lock switch P. 128
④ Door lock switch....P. 103
⑤ Power window switches P. 128
⑥ VSC OFF switch....P. 212, 213

① Audio remote control switches ^2 P. 230
② Telephone switches ^2 P. 299
③ Meter control switches P. 86, 87
④ LDA (Lane Departure Alert) switch ^1 P. 190
⑤ Cruise control switch....P. 199
⑥ Talk switch ^2 P. 299

① EV drive mode switch....P. 147
② “ECO MODE” switch P. 152
③ “PWR MODE” switch.... P. 152
④ P position switch....P. 151

^*1 : If equipped

*2: For vehicles with navigation/multimedia system, refer to "Navigation and Multimedia System Owner's Manual".

Interior

① SRS airbags....P. 34
② Floor mats P. 26
③ Front seats P. 117
④ Head restraints P. 121
⑤ Seat belts....P.30
⑥ Console box....P. 335
⑦ Inside lock buttons P. 103
⑧ Cup holders....P. 337
⑨ Rear seats P. 119

① Inside rear view mirror P. 125
② Sun visors* P. 343
③ Vanity mirrors P. 343
④ Vanity lights P. 331
⑤ Interior lights/personal lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 331, 332
⑥ Auxiliary boxes....P. 338
⑦ Assist grips P. 346

*: NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur. (→P. 61)

Not for Reproduction

For safety and security

1

1-1. For safe use

Before driving....26

For safety drive....28

Seat belts....30

SRS airbags....34

Safety information for children....44

Child restraint systems .....45

Installing child restraints .....53

Exhaust gas precautions....63

1-2. Hybrid system

Hybrid system features......64

Hybrid system precautions....68

1-3. Theft deterrent system

Immobilizer system......75

Before driving

Floor mat

Use only floor mats designed specifically for vehicles of the same model and model year as your vehicle. Fix them securely in place onto the carpet.

1 Insert the retaining hooks (clips) into the floor mat eyelets.

2 Turn the upper knob of each retaining hook (clip) to secure the floor mats in place.

*: Always align the marks.

The shape of the retaining hooks (clips) may differ from that shown in the illustration.

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause the driver's floor mat to slip, possibly interfering with the pedals while driving. An unexpectedly high speed may result or it may become difficult to stop the vehicle. This could lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

■When installing the driver's floor mat

• Do not use floor mats designed for other models or different model year vehicles, even if they are Toyota Genuine floor mats.
• Only use floor mats designed for the driver's seat.
  ●Always install the floor mat securely using the retaining hooks (clips) provided.
• Do not use two or more floor mats on top of each other.
• Do not place the floor mat bottom-side up or upside-down.

Before driving

• Check that the floor mat is securely fixed in the correct place with all the provided retaining hooks (clips). Be especially careful to perform this check after cleaning the floor.
  With the hybrid system stopped and the P shift position selected, fully depress each pedal to the floor to make sure it does not interfere with the floor mat.

For safety drive

For safe driving, adjust the seat and mirror to an appropriate position before driving.

Correct driving posture

① Adjust the angle of the seatback so that you are sitting straight up and so that you do not have to lean forward to steer. (→P. 117)
② Adjust the seat so that you can depress the pedals fully and so that your arms bend slightly at the elbow when gripping the steering wheel. (→P. 117)
③ Lock the head restraint in place with the center of the head restraint closest to the top of your ears. (→P. 121)
④ Wear the seat belt correctly. (→P. 30)

Correct use of the seat belts

Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the vehicle. (→P. 30)

Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt.

$$ (\rightarrow \mathrm{P}. 4 5) $$

Adjusting the mirrors

Make sure that you can see backward clearly by adjusting the inside and outside rear view mirrors properly. ( P. 125, 126)

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

• Do not adjust the position of the driver's seat while driving. Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
• Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback. A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint.
• Do not place anything under the front seats. Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat tracks and stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an accident and the adjustment mechanism may also be damaged.
  ●Always observe the legal speed limit when driving on public roads.
• When driving over long distances, take regular breaks before you start to feel tired.
  Also, if you feel tired or sleepy while driving, do not force yourself to continue driving and take a break immediately.

Seat belts

Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the vehicle.

Correct use of the seat belts

●Extend the shoulder belt so that it comes fully over the shoulder, but does not come into contact with the neck or slide off the shoulder.

●Position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips.

- Adjust the position of the seatback. Sit up straight and well back in the seat.

●Do not twist the seat belt.

Line drawing of a person seated in a chair with a horizontal bar, no text or symbols present

Fastening and releasing the seat belt

① To fasten the seat belt, push the plate into the buckle until a click sound is heard.
② To release the seat belt, press the release button.

Adjusting the seat belt shoulder anchor height (front seats)

① Push the seat belt shoulder anchor down while pressing the release button.
② Push the seat belt shoulder anchor up.

Move the height adjuster up and down as needed until you hear a click.

Seat belt pretensioners (front seats)

The pretensioners help the seat belts to quickly restrain the occupants by retracting the seat belts when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of severe frontal or side collision.

The pretensioners do not activate in the event of a minor frontal impact, a minor side impact, a rear impact or a vehicle rollover.

Top-down technical illustration of a car interior showing driver and passenger (no text or symbols)

Emergency locking retractor (ELR)

The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also lock if you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to extend so that you can move around fully.

Child seat belt usage

The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult size.

Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt. (→P. 45)

When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt, follow the instructions regarding seat belt usage. (→P. 30)

■ Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated (front seats)

If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate for the first collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent collisions.

Seat belt regulations

If seat belt regulations exist in the country where you reside, please contact your Toyota dealer for seat belt replacement or installation.

WARNING

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

■Wearing a seat belt

●Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt.
●Always wear a seat belt properly.
● Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt for more than one person at once, including children.
●Toyota recommends that children be seated in the rear seat and always use a seat belt and/or an appropriate child restraint system.
●To achieve a proper seating position, do not recline the seat more than necessary. The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting up straight and well back in the seats.
●Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm.
●Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips.

■ Pregnant women

Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. (→P. 30)

Women who are pregnant should position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips in the same manner as other occupants, extending the shoulder belt completely over the shoulder and avoiding belt contact with the rounding of the abdominal area.

If the seat belt is not worn properly, not only the pregnant woman, but also the fetus could suffer death or serious injury as a result of sudden braking or a collision.

Two illustrations of a person seated in different positions, one using a shoulder strap and the other holding a belt (no text or symbols)

WARNING

■People suffering illness

Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. (→P. 30)

■When children are in the vehicle

Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes twisted around a child's neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death.

If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut the belt.

■Seat belt pretensioners (front seats)

If the pretensioner has activated, the SRS warning light will come on. In that case, the seat belt cannot be used again and must be replaced at your Toyota dealer.

■Adjustable shoulder anchor (front seats)

Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of your shoulder. The belt should be kept away from your neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Failure to do so could reduce the amount of protection in an accident and cause death or serious injuries in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident. (→P. 31)

■Seat belt damage and wear

• Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be jammed in the door.
• Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose parts. Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat belts cannot protect an occupant from death or serious injury.
• Ensure that the belt and plate are locked and the belt is not twisted. If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact your Toyota dealer.
• Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been involved in a serious accident, even if there is no obvious damage.
• Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the seat belts. Have any necessary repairs carried out by your Toyota dealer. Inappropriate handling may lead to incorrect operation.

SRS airbags

The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the occupants. They work together with the seat belts to help reduce the risk of death or serious injury.

◆ SRS front airbags

① SRS driver airbag/front passenger airbag Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front passenger from impact with interior components
② SRS driver's knee airbag Can help provide driver protection

SRS side and curtain shield airbags

③ SRS front side airbags Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants
④ SRS curtain shield airbags Can help protect primarily the head of occupants in the outer seats

SRS airbag system components

① Seat belt pretensioners and force limiters
② Side impact sensors (front)
③ Driver's knee airbag
④ Driver airbag
⑤ Side impact sensors (rear)

⑥ Front side airbags
⑦ Curtain shield airbags
⑧ SRS warning light
⑨ Front passenger airbag
⑩ Front impact sensors
⑪ Airbag sensor assembly

The main SRS airbag system components are shown above. The SRS airbag system is controlled by the airbag sensor assembly. As the airbags deploy, a chemical reaction in the inflators quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain the motion of the occupants.

WARNING

■SRS airbag precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding the SRS airbags.

Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

●The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts properly.

The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts.

●The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag.

Since the risk zone for the driver's airbag is the first 50 - 75 mm (2 - 3 in.) of inflation, placing yourself 250 mm (10 in.) from your driver airbag provides you with a clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from the center of the steering wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less than 250 mm (10 in.) away now, you can change your driving position in several ways:

• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably.
• Slightly recline the back of the seat.

Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 250 mm (10 in.) distance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, simply by reclining the back of the seat somewhat. If reclining the back of your seat makes it hard to see the road, raise yourself by using a firm, non-slippery cushion, or raise the seat if your vehicle has that feature.

- If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the airbag toward your chest instead of your head and neck.

The seat should be adjusted as recommended above, while still maintaining control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of the instrument panel controls.

●The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very close to the airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the airbag as possible with the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits upright.
- Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or seriously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small to use a seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint system. Toyota strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seats of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seats are safer for infants and children than the front passenger seat. (→P. 45)

WARNING

■SRS airbag precautions

- Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean against the dashboard.

- Do not allow a child to stand in front of the SRS front passenger airbag unit or sit on the knees of a front passenger.

- Do not allow the front seat occupants to hold items on their knees.

- Do not lean against the door, the roof side rail or the front, side and rear pillars.

- Do not allow anyone to kneel on the passenger seats toward the door or put their head or hands outside the vehicle.

WARNING

■SRS airbag precautions

- Do not attach anything to or lean anything against areas such as the dashboard, steering wheel pad, lower portion of the instrument panel. These items can become projectiles when the SRS driver, front passenger and driver's knee airbag deploy.

- Do not attach anything to areas such as a door, windshield, side door glass, front or rear pillar, roof side rail and assist grip.

- If a vinyl cover is put on the area where the SRS driver's knee airbag will deploy, be sure to remove it.

WARNING

■SRS airbag precautions

• Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side airbags inflate as they may interfere with inflation of the airbags. Such accessories may prevent the side airbags from activating correctly, disable the system or cause the side airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury.
• Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS airbag components. Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction.
• Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS airbags have deployed (inflated) as they may be hot.
• If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbags have deployed, open a door or window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do so. Wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation.
• If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel pad and front and rear pillar garnishes, are damaged or cracked, have them replaced by your Toyota dealer.

■ Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components

Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications without consulting your Toyota dealer. The SRS airbags may malfunction or deploy (inflate) accidentally, causing death or serious injury.

●Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags
●Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel, instrument panel, dashboard, seats or seat upholstery, front, side and rear pillars or roof side rails
●Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the occupant compartment

■ Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components

●Installation of grille guard (bull bars, kangaroo bar, etc.), snow plows or winches
Modifications to the vehicle's suspension system
● Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radio (RF-transmitter) and CD players
● Modifications to your vehicle for a person with a physical disability

■If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)

• Slight abrasions, burns, bruising etc., may be sustained from SRS airbags, due to the extremely high speed deployment (inflation) by hot gases.
  ●A loud noise and white powder will be emitted.
  ● Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) as well as the front seats, and parts of the front and rear pillars and roof side rail, may be hot for several minutes. The airbag itself may also be hot.
  ●The windshield may crack.

■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS front airbags)

●The SRS front airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to an approximately 20 - 30 km/h [12 - 18 mph] frontal collision with a fixed wall that does not move or deform).

However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher in the following situations:

• If the vehicle strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole, which can move or deform on impact
• If the vehicle is involved in an underride collision, such as a collision in which the front of the vehicle “underrides”, or goes under, the bed of a truck

- Depending on the type of collision, it is possible that only the seat belt pretensioners will activate.

■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS side and curtain shield airbags)

●The SRS side and curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to the impact force produced by an approximately 1500 kg [3300 lb.] vehicle colliding with the vehicle cabin from a direction perpendicular to the vehicle orientation at an approximate speed of 20 - 30 km/h [12 - 18 mph]).
●The SRS curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of a severe frontal collision.

Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other than a collision

The SRS front airbags and SRS curtain shield airbags may also deploy if a serious impact occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration.

●Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard surface
●Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
● Landing hard or falling

■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags (SRS front airbags)

The SRS front airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed frontal collision. But, whenever a collision of any type causes sufficient forward deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front airbags may occur.

• Collision from the side
• Collision from the rear
  ● Vehicle rollover

■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags (SRS side and curtain shield airbags)

The SRS side and curtain shield airbags may not activate if the vehicle is subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles, or a collision to the side of the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment.

- Collision from the side to the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment

- Collision from the side at an angle

Top-down diagram of a car showing two side views with arrows indicating direction (no text or symbols)

The SRS side airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a frontal or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed side collision.

• Collision from the front
• Collision from the rear
  ● Vehicle rollover

Technical line drawing of a car showing top, front, and side views with no visible text or symbols

The SRS curtain shield airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed side or low-speed frontal collision.

• Collision from the rear
  ● Vehicle rollover

Diagram showing two car illustrations with an arrow indicating motion, no text or symbols present

■When to contact your Toyota dealer

In the following cases, the vehicle will require inspection and/or repair. Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

●Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated.
●The front of the vehicle is damaged or deformed, or was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the SRS front airbags to inflate.

Top-down line drawing of a car showing side and top views with directional arrows (no text or symbols)

● A portion of a door or its surrounding area is damaged or deformed, or the vehicle was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the SRS side and curtain shield airbags to inflate.

- The pad section of the steering wheel or dashboard near the front passenger airbag or lower portion of the instrument panel is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

Line drawing of a car interior showing steering wheel, dashboard, and steering wheel (no text or symbols)

●The surface of the seats with the side airbag is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

Line drawing of a car interior showing two seats and rear seats, with no text or symbols present.

The portion of the front pillars, rear pillars or roof side rail garnishes (padding) containing the curtain shield airbags inside is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

Line drawing of a car interior showing driver, seats, and dashboard (no text or symbols)

Safety information for children

Observe the following precautions when children are in the vehicle.

Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt.

• It is recommended that children sit in the rear seats to avoid accidental contact with the shift lever, wiper switch, etc.
• Use the rear door child-protector lock or the window lock switch to avoid children opening the door while driving or operating the power window accidentally.
• Do not let small children operate equipment which may catch or pinch body parts, such as the power window, hood, back door, seats, etc.

WARNING

Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or use the key.

Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with the windows or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children.

Child restraint systems

Toyota strongly urges the use of child restraint systems.

Points to remember

Studies have shown that installing a child restraint on a rear seat is much safer than installing one on the front passenger seat.

• Choose a child restraint system that suits your vehicle and is appropriate to the age and size of the child.
• For installation details, follow the instructions provided with the child restraint system.

General installation instructions are provided in this manual.

(→P. 53)

• If child restraint system regulations exist in the country where you reside, please contact your Toyota dealer for the child restraint system installation.
  ●Toyota recommends that you use a child restraint system which conforms to the regulation ECE No.44.

Types of child restraints

Child restraint systems are classified into the following 5 groups according to the regulation ECE No.44:

Group 0: Up to 10 kg (22 lb.) (0 - 9 months)

Group 0+: Up to 13 kg (28 lb.) (0 - 2 years)

Group I: 9 to 18 kg (20 to 39 lb.) (9 months - 4 years)

Group II: 15 to 25 kg (34 to 55 lb.) (4 years - 7 years)

Group III: 22 to 36 kg (49 to 79 lb.) (6 years - 12 years)

In this owner's manual, the following 3 types of popular child restraint systems that can be secured with the seat belts are explained:

▶ Baby seat (infant seat)

Equal to Group 0 and 0^+ of ECE No.44

▶ Child seat (convertible seat)

Equal to Group 0 ^+ and I of ECE No.44

Line drawing of a car interior seatbelt with a person seated in the seat (no text or symbols)

Illustration of a child seated in a car seat, no text or symbols present

▶ Junior seat (booster seat)

Equal to Group II and III of ECE No.44

Illustration of a child sitting in a car seatbelt, giving a thumbs-up (no text or symbols)

Child restraint system suitability for various seating positions

Information provided in the table shows your child restraint system suitability for various seating positions.

Mass groups\Seating position	Front passenger seat	Rear seat
		Outboard Center	U
0Up to 10 kg (22 lb.)(0 - 9 months)	XNever put	U	U
0^+ Up to 13 kg (28 lb.)(0 - 2 years)	XNever put	U	U
I9 to 18 kg(20 to 39 lb.)(9 months - 4 years)	Rear-facing —XNever put	U	U
	Forward-facing — UF*
II, III15 to 36 kg(34 to 79 lb.)(4 - 12 years)	UF*	U	U

Key of letters inserted in the above table:

U: Suitable for “universal” category child restraint system approved for the use in this mass group.

UF: Suitable for forward-facing “universal” category child restraint system approved for the use in this mass group.

X: Not suitable seat position for children in this mass group.

*: Adjust the front seat back to the most upright position. Move the front seat cushion to the fully rearward.

When securing some types of child restraint systems in rear seat, it may not be possible to properly use the seat belts in positions next to the child restraint without interfering with it or affecting seat belt effectiveness. Be sure your seat belt fits snugly across your shoulder and low on your hips. If it does not, or if it interferes with the child restraint, move to a different position. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

Other child restraint system which is different from the system mentioned in the table can be used, but the suitability of the systems must be carefully checked with the child restraint system manufacturer concerned and the seller of those seats.

Child restraint system suitability for various seating positions (with ISOFIX rigid anchors)

Information provided in the table shows your child restraint system suitability for various seating positions.

Mass groups Size class Fixture		Vehicle ISOFIX positions
		Rear outboard
Carrycot	F ISO/L1 X
	G ISO/L2 X
		(1) X
0Up to 10 kg (22 lb.)(0 - 9 months)	E	I S C
		(1) X
0^+ Up to 13 kg (28 lb.)(0 - 2 years)	E	I S C
	D	I S C
	C	I S C
		(1) X
I9 to 18 kg(20 to 39 lb.)(9 months - 4 years)	D	I S C
	C	I S C
	B	I S C
	B1 ISO/F2X IUF
	A	I S C
		(1) X
II, III15 to 36 kg (34 to 79 lb.)(4 - 12 years)		(1) X

(1) For the child restraint system which do not carry the ISO/XX size class identification (A to G), for the applicable mass group, the car manufacturer shall indicate the vehicle specific ISOFIX child restraint system(s) recommended for each position.

Key of letters inserted in the above table:

IUF: Suitable for ISOFIX forward-facing child restraint systems of universal category approved for use in this mass group.

X: ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems in this mass group and/or this size class.

When securing some types of child restraint systems in rear seat, it may not be possible to properly use the seat belts in positions next to the child restraint without interfering with it or affecting seat belt effectiveness. Be sure your seat belt fits snugly across your shoulder and low on your hips. If it does not, or if it interferes with the child restraint, move to a different position. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

Other child restraint systems different from the systems mentioned in the table can be used, but the suitability of the systems must be carefully checked with the child restraint system manufacturer and retailer.

When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat

When you have to use a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, adjust the following:

●The seatback to the most upright position
- Move the seat as far back as possible. If the CRS cannot be installed properly, due to hitting part of the vehicle interior, head restraint and so forth, adjust the position of the front seat, its seatback angle and remove the head restraint.

■Selecting an appropriate child restraint system

• Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt.
• If the child is too large for a child restraint system, sit the child on a rear seat and use the vehicle's seat belt. (→P. 30)

WARNING

■ Using a child restraint system

The use of a child restraint system not suitable for the vehicle may not properly secure the infant or child. It may result in death or serious injury (in the event of sudden braking or an accident).

■Child restraint precautions

For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child must be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system depending on the age and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is not a substitute for a child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be crushed against the windshield, or between you and the vehicle's interior.
Toyota strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that conforms to the size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.
● Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat.
In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear-facing child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat.
A forward-facing child restraint system may be installed on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. A child restraint system that requires a upper anchorage strap should not be used in the front passenger seat since there is no upper anchorage strap anchor for the front passenger seat. Adjust the seatback as upright as possible and always move the seat as far back as possible because the front passenger airbag could inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured.

WARNING

■Child restraint precautions

• Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the door or the area of the seat, front and rear pillars or roof side rails from which the SRS side airbags or SRS curtain shield airbags deploy even if the child is seated in the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags inflate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child.
  Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If it is not secured properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child in the event of a sudden stop or accident.

■When children are in the vehicle

Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes twisted around a child's neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death.

If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut the belt.

■When the child restraint system is not in use

• Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is not in use. Do not store the child restraint system unsecured in the passenger compartment.
• If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the vehicle or store it securely in the luggage compartment. This will prevent it from injuring passengers in the event of a sudden stop or accident.
  If a head restraint was removed when installing a child restraint system, always install the head restraint before driving.

Installing child restraints

Follow the child restraint system manufacturer's instructions. Firmly secure child restraints to the seats using a seat belt or ISOFIX rigid anchors. Attach the upper anchorage strap when installing a child restraint.

Seat belts (An ELR belt requires a locking clip)

Line drawing of a car seat with rear seats and seatbelt, no text or symbols present

ISOFIX rigid anchors

Lower anchors are provided for the outboard rear seats. (Tags displaying the location of the anchors are attached to the seats.)

Child restraint anchor fitting

An anchor fitting is provided for each rear seat.

Installing child restraints using a seat belt

■ Rear-facing — Baby seat (infant seat)/child seat (convertible seat)

1 Adjust the head restraint to the uppermost position.

Diagram of a car backrest and seat assembly with a pink arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

2 Place the child restraint system on the rear seat facing the rear of the vehicle.

Line drawing of a car seat assembly with no text or symbols

3 Run the seat belt through the child restraint system and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.

Diagram of a car seatbelt with a belt and arrow indicating a location (no text or symbols present)

4 Remove the luggage cover. ( P. 341)

5 Latch the attaching clip of the upper anchorage strap onto the anchor fitting. (→P. 59)

Run the upper anchorage strap under the head restraint.

Make sure the seat belt is tightly secured, and that there is no slack in the belt.

6 Install a locking clip near the tab of the lap and shoulder belt by inserting the lap and shoulder webbing through the recesses of the locking clip. Buckle the belt again. If the belt has any slack, release the buckle and reinstall the locking clip.

Diagram of a car seatbelt buckle with a lightning bolt indicating compression (no text or symbols)

■ Forward-facing — Child seat (convertible seat)

1 Adjust the head restraint to the uppermost position.

If your child restraint system interferes with a head restraint and cannot be installed properly, install the child restraint system after removing the head restraint.

Diagram of a car interior showing a handle and seat with an arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols present)

2 Place the child restraint system on the seat facing the front of the vehicle.

Line drawing of a car seat assembly with rear seats and seatbelt (no text or symbols)

3 Run the seat belt through the child restraint system and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.

Line drawing of a car seat with a belt buckle, no text or symbols present

4 Remove the luggage cover. ( P. 341)
5 Latch the attaching clip of the upper anchorage strap onto the anchor fitting. (→P. 59)

Run the upper anchorage strap under the head restraint.

Make sure the seat belt is tightly secured, and that there is no slack in the belt.

6 Install a locking clip near the tab of the lap and shoulder belt by inserting the lap and shoulder webbing through the recesses of the locking clip. Buckle the belt again. If the belt has any slack, release the buckle and reinstall the locking clip.

Diagram of a car seatbelt with a double buckle and cable, showing a force arrow (no text or symbols)

■ Junior seat (booster seat)

1 Place the child restraint system on the seat facing the front of the vehicle.

Line drawing of a car seat with a cushioned seat, no text or symbols present

2 Sit the child in the child restraint system. Fit the seat belt to the child restraint system according to the manufacturer's instructions and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.

Illustration of a child wearing a seatbelt sitting in a car seat, giving a thumbs-up (no text or symbols present)

Check that the shoulder belt is correctly positioned over the child's shoulder and that the lap belt is as low as possible. (→P. 30)

Removing a child restraint installed with a seat belt

Push the buckle release button and fully retract the seat belt.

Mechanical diagram showing a belt buckle assembly with a pink arrow indicating force (no text or symbols present)

Installation with ISOFIX rigid anchors

1 Adjust the head restraint to the uppermost position.

If your child restraint system interferes with a head restraint and cannot be installed properly, install the child restraint system after removing the head restraint.

Diagram of a car backrest seat assembly with a highlighted seatbelt and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

2 If the child restraint has a upper anchorage strap, remove the luggage cover. (→P. 341)
3 Widen the gap between the seat cushion and seatback slightly.
4 Latch the buckles onto the exclusive fixing bars.

If the child restraint has a upper anchorage strap, the upper anchorage strap should be latched onto the anchor fitting.

Run the upper anchorage strap under the head restraint.

Using the child restraint anchor fitting

1 Adjust the head restraint to the uppermost position.

If your child restraint system interferes with a head restraint and cannot be installed properly, install the child restraint system after removing the head restraint.

Diagram of a car backrest seat assembly with a highlighted seatbelt and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

2 Secure the child restraint system using the seat belt or ISOFIX rigid anchors.

Line drawing of a car seat with rear seats and seatbelt, no text or symbols present

3 Remove the luggage cover. (→P. 341)
4 Latch the attaching clip onto the anchor fitting and tighten the upper anchorage strap.

Run the upper anchorage strap under the head restraint.

Make sure the upper anchorage strap is securely latched.

① Attaching clip
② Upper anchorage strap
③ Anchor fitting

■When installing a child restraint system

You need a locking clip to install the child restraint system. Follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the system. If your child restraint system does not provide a locking clip, you can purchase the following item from your Toyota dealer:

Locking clip for child restraint system

(Part No. 73119-22010)

WARNING

■When installing a child restraint system

Follow the directions given in the child restraint system installation manual and fix the child restraint system securely in place.

If the child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place, the child or other passengers may be seriously injured or even killed in the event of a sudden braking or an accident.

• If the driver's seat interferes with the child restraint system and prevents it from being attached correctly, attach the child restraint system to the left-hand rear seat.
• Adjust the front passenger seat so that it does not interfere with the child restraint system.
• Only put a forward-facing child restraint system on the front seat when unavoidable.

When installing a forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury if the airbags deploy (inflate).

Illustration of a child seated in a car safety seat inside a vehicle (no text or symbols visible)

WARNING

■When installing a child restraint system

●Never use a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. The force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to children in the event of an accident.

There is a label(s) on the passenger side sun visor, indicating it is forbidden to attach a rear-facing child restraint system to the front passenger seat. Details of the label(s) are shown in the illustration below.

CTN17AG588

WARNING

■When installing a child restraint system

• If child restraint system regulations exist in the country where you reside, please contact your Toyota dealer for the child restraint system installation.
• When a junior (booster) seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of the child's shoulder. The belt should be kept away from the child's neck, but not so that it could fall off the child's shoulder. Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury in the event of an accident or a sudden braking.

- Ensure that the belt and plate are securely locked and the seat belt is not twisted.

● Shake the child restraint system left and right, and forward and backward to ensure that it has been securely installed.

●After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat.

●Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer.

■ To correctly attach a child restraint system to the anchors

When using the lower anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects around the anchors and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child restraint system. Make sure the child restraint system is securely attached, or it may cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden braking or an accident.

■ Using child restraint anchorages

WARNING: child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seatbelts, harnesses, or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.

Exhaust gas precautions

Harmful substance to the human body is included in exhaust gases if inhaled.

WARNING

Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause exhaust gases enter the vehicle and may lead to an accident caused by light-headedness, or may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

■ Important points while driving

• Keep the back door closed.
• If you smell exhaust gases in the vehicle even when the back door is closed, open the windows and have the vehicle inspected at your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

When parking

• If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area or a closed area, such as a garage, stop the hybrid system.
• Do not leave the vehicle with the hybrid system on for a long time. If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space and ensure that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.
• Do not leave the hybrid system operating in an area with snow build-up, or where it is snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the hybrid system is operating, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle.

Exhaust pipe

The exhaust system needs to be checked periodically. If there is a hole or crack caused by corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise, be sure to have the vehicle inspected and repaired by your Toyota dealer.

Hybrid system features

Your vehicle is a hybrid vehicle. It has characteristics different from conventional vehicles. Be sure you are closely familiar with the characteristics of your vehicle, and operate it with care.

The hybrid system combines the use of a gasoline engine and an electric motor (traction motor) according to driving conditions, improving fuel efficiency and reducing exhaust emissions.

The illustration is an example for explanation and may differ from the actual item.

① Gasoline engine
② Electric motor (Traction motor)

When stopped/during start off

The gasoline engine stops ^ , when the vehicle is stopped. During start off, the electric motor (traction motor) drives the vehicle. At slow speeds or when traveling down a gentle slope, the engine is stopped ^ , and the electric motor (traction motor) is used.

When the shift position is in N, the hybrid battery (traction battery) is not being charged.

*: When the hybrid battery (traction battery) requires charging or the engine is warming up, etc., the gasoline engine will not automatically stop. (→P. 66)

During normal driving

The gasoline engine is predominantly used. The electric motor (traction motor) charges the hybrid battery as necessary.

When accelerating sharply

When the accelerator pedal is depressed heavily, the power of the hybrid battery (traction battery) is added to that of the gasoline engine via the electric motor (traction motor).

When braking (regenerative braking)

The wheels operate the electric motor (traction motor) as a power generator, and the hybrid battery (traction battery) is charged.

■ Regenerative braking

In the following situations, kinetic energy is converted to electric energy and deceleration force can be obtained in conjunction with the recharging of the hybrid battery (traction battery).

●The accelerator pedal is released with the shift position in D or B.
●The brake pedal is depressed with the shift position in D or B.

■EV indicator

The EV indicator comes on when the vehicle is driven using only the electric motor (traction motor) or the gasoline engine is stopped.

Conditions in which the gasoline engine may not stop

The gasoline engine starts and stops automatically. However, it may not stop automatically in the following conditions:

● During gasoline engine warm-up
● During hybrid battery (traction battery) charging
- When the temperature of the hybrid battery (traction battery) is high or low
- When the heater is switched on

- Charging the hybrid battery (traction battery)

As the gasoline engine charges the hybrid battery (traction battery), the battery does not need to be charged from an outside source. However, if the vehicle is left parked for a long time the hybrid battery (traction battery) will slowly discharge. For this reason, be sure to drive the vehicle at least once every few months for at least 30 minutes or 16 km (10 miles). If the hybrid battery (traction battery) becomes fully discharged and you are unable to start the hybrid system, contact your Toyota dealer.

■ Charging the 12-volt battery

→P. 435

■ After the 12-volt battery has discharged or when the terminal has been removed and installed during exchange, etc.

The gasoline engine may not stop even if the vehicle is being driven by the hybrid battery (traction battery). If this continues for a few days, contact your Toyota dealer.

■ Sounds and vibrations specific to a hybrid vehicle

There may be no engine sound or vibration even though the vehicle is able to move with the “READY” indicator is illuminated. For safety, apply the parking brake and make sure to shift the shift position to P when parked.

The following sounds or vibrations may occur when the hybrid system is operating and are not a malfunction:

●Motor sounds may be heard from the engine compartment.
● Sounds may be heard from the hybrid battery (traction battery) under the rear seats when the hybrid system starts or stops.
- Relay operating sounds such as a snap or soft clank will be emitted from the hybrid battery (traction battery), under the rear seats, when the hybrid system is started or stopped.
● Sounds from the hybrid system may be heard when the back door is open.
● Sounds may be heard from the transmission when the gasoline engine starts or stops, when driving at low speeds, or during idling.
●Engine sounds may be heard when accelerating sharply.
● Sounds may be heard due to regenerative braking when the brake pedal is depressed or as the accelerator pedal is released.
● Vibration may be felt when the gasoline engine starts or stops.
● Cooling fan sounds may be heard from the air intake vent on the side of the lower part of the rear left seat.

■ Maintenance, repair, recycling, and disposal

Contact your Toyota dealer regarding maintenance, repair, recycling and disposal. Do not dispose of the vehicle yourself.

Customization

Settings (e.g. on/off operation of the EV indicator) can be changed.

(Customizable features → P. 457)

Hybrid system precautions

Take care when handling the hybrid system, as it is a high voltage system (about 650 V at maximum) as well as contains parts that become extremely hot when the hybrid system is operating. Obey the warning labels attached to the vehicle.

The illustration is an example for explanation and may differ from the actual item.

① Warning label
② Service plug
③ Air conditioning compressor
④ Electric motor (traction motor)

⑤ Power control unit with DC/DC converter
⑥ Hybrid battery (traction battery)
⑦ High voltage cables (orange)

Hybrid battery (traction battery) air intake vent

There is an air intake vent on the side of the lower part of the rear left seat for the purpose of cooling the hybrid battery (traction battery). If the vent becomes blocked, the hybrid battery may overheat, leading to a reduction in hybrid battery output.

Diagram of a car interior showing seat, exhaust, and exhaust vent (no text or symbols)

Emergency shut off system

When a certain level of impact is detected by the impact sensor, the emergency shut off system blocks the high voltage current and stops the fuel pump to minimize the risk of electrocution and fuel leakage. If the emergency shut off system activates, your vehicle will not restart. To restart the hybrid system, contact your Toyota dealer.

Hybrid warning message

A message is automatically displayed when a malfunction occurs in the hybrid system or an improper operation is attempted.

If a warning message is shown on the multi-information display, read the message and follow the instructions. (→P. 411)

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no text or symbols visible)

If a warning light comes on, a warning message is displayed, or the 12-volt battery is disconnected

The hybrid system may not start. In this case, try to start the system again. If the “READY” indicator does not come on, contact your Toyota dealer.

Running out of fuel

When the vehicle has run out of fuel and the hybrid system cannot be started, refuel the vehicle with at least enough gasoline to make the low fuel level warning light ( P. 408) go off. If there is only a small amount of fuel, the hybrid system may not be able to start. (The standard amount of fuel is about 7.9 L [2.1 gal., 1.8 Imp. gal.] when the vehicle is on a level surface. This value may vary when the vehicle is on a slope. Add extra fuel when the vehicle is inclined.)

Electromagnetic waves

● High voltage parts and cables on hybrid vehicles incorporate electromagnetic shielding, and therefore emit approximately the same amount of electromagnetic waves as conventional gasoline powered vehicles or home electronic appliances.
- Your vehicle may cause sound interference in some third party-produced radio parts.

■Hybrid battery (traction battery)

The hybrid battery (traction battery) has a limited service life. The lifespan of the hybrid battery (traction battery) can change in accordance with driving style and driving conditions.

WARNING

■High voltage and high temperature precautions

This vehicle has high voltage DC and AC systems as well as a 12-volt system. DC and AC high voltage is very dangerous and can cause severe burns and electric shock that may result in death or serious injury.

●Never touch, disassemble, remove or replace the high voltage parts, cables or their connectors.

●The hybrid system will become hot after starting as the system uses high voltage. Be careful of both the high voltage and the high temperature, and always obey the warning labels attached to the vehicle.

●Never try to open the service plug access hole located under the rear seat. The service plug is used only when the vehicle is serviced and is subject to high voltage.

Technical line drawing of a vehicle chassis with internal components and a highlighted section (no text or symbols)

WARNING

Road accident cautions

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of death or serious injury:

• Stop the vehicle in a safe place to prevent subsequent accidents, apply the parking brake, shift the shift position to P, and turn the hybrid system off.
• Do not touch the high voltage parts, cables or connectors. Carefully check to see if there are exposed high voltage parts or cables.
• If electric wires are exposed inside or outside your vehicle, an electric shock may occur. Never touch exposed electric wires.
• If a fluid leak occurs, do not touch the fluid as it may be strong alkaline electrolyte from the hybrid battery (traction battery). If it comes into contact with your skin or eyes, wash it off immediately with a large amount of water or, if possible, boric acid solution. Seek immediate medical attention.
• If a fire occurs in the hybrid vehicle, leave the vehicle as soon as possible. Never use a fire extinguisher that is not meant for electric fires. Using even a small amount of water may be dangerous.
• If your vehicle needs to be towed, do so with the front wheels raised. If the wheels connected to the electric motor (traction motor) are on the ground when towing, the motor may continue to generate electricity. This may cause a fire. ( P. 400)
  ● Carefully inspect the ground under the vehicle. If you find that liquid has leaked onto the ground, the fuel system may have been damaged. Leave the vehicle as soon as possible and contact your Toyota dealer.

WARNING

■Hybrid battery (traction battery)

●Never resell, hand over or modify the hybrid battery. To prevent accidents, hybrid batteries that have been removed from a disposed vehicle are collected through Toyota dealer. Do not dispose of the battery yourself.

Unless the battery is properly collected, the following may occur, resulting in death or serious injury:

• The hybrid battery may be illegally disposed of or dumped, and it is hazardous to the environment or someone may touch a high voltage part, resulting in an electric shock.
• The hybrid battery is intended to be used exclusively with your hybrid vehicle. If the hybrid battery is used outside of your vehicle or modified in any way, accidents such as electric shock, heat generation, smoke generation, an explosion and electrolyte leakage may occur.

When reselling or handing over your vehicle, the possibility of an accident is extremely high because the person receiving the vehicle may not be aware of these dangers.

- If your vehicle is disposed of without the hybrid battery having been removed, there is a danger of serious electric shock if high voltage parts, cables and their connectors are touched. In the event that your vehicle must be disposed of, the hybrid battery must be disposed of by your Toyota dealer or a qualified service shop. If the hybrid battery is not disposed of properly, it may cause electric shock that can result in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

Hybrid battery (traction battery) air intake vent

• Do not place objects that will block the air intake vent. The hybrid battery (traction battery) may overheat and be damaged.
  ● Clean the air intake vent regularly to prevent the hybrid battery (traction battery) from overheating.
• Do not get water or foreign materials in the air intake vent as this may cause a short circuit and damage the hybrid battery (traction battery).
• Do not carry large amounts of water such as water cooler bottles in the vehicle. If water spills onto the hybrid battery (traction battery), the battery may be damaged. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
  ● A filter is installed to the air intake vent. When the filter remains noticeably dirty even after cleaning the air intake vent, filter cleaning or replacement is recommended. When cleaning or replacing the filter, contact your Toyota dealer.

When “Maintenance required for hybrid battery cooling parts at your dealer” is shown on the multi-information display, the filter may be clogged. Have the filter cleaned or replaced at your Toyota dealer.

Immobilizer system

The vehicle's keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the hybrid system from starting if a key has not been previously registered in the vehicle's on-board computer.

Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

This system is designed to help prevent vehicle theft but does not guarantee absolute security against all vehicle thefts.

The indicator light flashes after the power switch has been turned off to indicate that the system is operating.

The indicator light stops flashing after the power switch has been turned to ACCESSORY or ON mode to indicate that the system has been canceled.

System maintenance

The vehicle has a maintenance-free type immobilizer system.

Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction

● If the grip portion of the key is in contact with a metallic object
- If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key to the security system (key with a built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle

NOTICE

■To ensure the system operates correctly

Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.

2. Instrument cluster

Warning lights and indicators ....78

Gauges and meters......82

Multi-information display 84

Energy monitor/consumption screen .....91

Warning lights and indicators

The warning lights and indicators on the instrument cluster and center panel inform the driver of the status of the vehicle's various systems.

For the purpose of explanation, the following illustration displays all warning lights and indicators illuminated.

Warning lights

Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in the indicated vehicle's systems.

*1: These lights turn on when the power switch is turned to ON mode to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the hybrid system is on, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come on, or turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

*2: The light flashes to indicate a malfunction.

*3: This light illuminates on the center panel.

Indicators

The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the vehicle's various systems.

Turn signal indicator ( P. 157)

EV indicator ( P. 66)

Tail light indicator ( P. 159)

Security indicator (→P. 75)

Headlight high beam indicator ( P. 159)

Power mode indicator ( P. 152)

*1

Automatic High Beam indicator ( P. 195)

“ECO MODE” indicator (→P. 152)

(Green) (if equipped)

Front fog light indicator ( P. 163)

EV drive mode indicator ( P. 147)

(if equipped)

*1,4

Cruise control indicator ( P. 199)

PCS warning light ( P. 180)

Cruise control "SET" indicator (→P. 199)

"READY" indicator (→P. 142)

LDA (Lane Departure Alert) indicator (→P. 190)

Low outside temperature indicator ( P. 82)

(Green) (if equipped)

*1, 2

Slip indicator (→P. 212)

Shift position indicators ( P. 149)

VSC OFF indicator (→P. 212)

*1: These lights turn on when the power switch is turned to ON mode to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the hybrid system is on, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come on, or turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
^2 : The light flashes to indicate that the system is operating.
*3: This light illuminates on the center panel.
^4 : The light comes on when the system is turned off.
*5: When the outside temperature is approximately 3°C (37°F) or lower, the indicator will flash for approximately 10 seconds, then stay on.

WARNING

If a safety system warning light does not come on

Should a safety system light such as the ABS and SRS warning light not come on when you start the hybrid system, this could mean that these systems are not available to help protect you in an accident, which could result in death or serious injury. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately if this occurs.

NOTICE

■To prevent damage to the engine and its components

If the high engine coolant temperature warning light is shown, the engine may be overheating. In this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place, and check the hybrid system after it has cooled completely. (→P. 438)

Gauges and meters

① Hybrid System Indicator

Displays hybrid system output or regeneration level ( P. 83)

② Outside temperature

Displays the outside temperature within the range of -40^ ( -40^ ) to 50^ ( 122^ ). Low outside temperature indicator comes on when the ambient temperature is 3^ ( 37^ ) or lower.

③ Speedometer

Displays the vehicle speed.

④ Fuel gauge

Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank.

⑤ Multi-information display

→P. 84

⑥ Shift position indicators

Displays the shift position. ( P. 149)

■The meters and display illuminate when

The power switch is in ON mode.

■ Outside temperature display

In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be displayed, or the display may take longer than normal to change.

• When stopped, or driving at low speeds (less than 15 km/h [9 mph])
• When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/exit of a garage, tunnel, etc.)
• If “—” is displayed continuously, the system may be malfunctioning. Take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

Hybrid System Indicator

① Charge area

Shows regenerative charging.

② Hybrid Eco area

Shows that gasoline engine power is not being used very often.

The gasoline engine will automatically stop and restart under various conditions.

③ Eco area

Shows that the vehicle is being driven in an Eco-friendly manner.

④ Power area

Shows that an Eco-friendly driving range is being exceeded (during full power driving etc.)

• By keeping the indicator needle within Eco area, more Eco-friendly driving can be achieved.
• Charge area indicates regeneration* status. Regenerated energy will be used to charge the hybrid battery (traction battery).

*: When used in this manual, “regeneration” refers to the conversion of energy created by the movement of the vehicle into electrical energy.

Engine speed

On hybrid vehicles, engine speed is precisely controlled in order to help improve fuel efficiency and reduce exhaust emissions etc.

There are times when the engine speed that is displayed may differ even when vehicle operation and driving conditions are the same.

Multi-information display

Display content

The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of driving-related data, such as the current outside temperature. The multi-information display can also be used to change the display settings and other settings.

● Outside temperature ( P. 82)
●Pop-up display

In some situations a warning message or the operation status of a system will be temporarily displayed on the multi-information display.

●Trip information/Meter light control ( P. 86)

Displays the following items:

• Odometer
• Trip meter
• Meter light control

●Menu icons (→P. 87)

Select a menu icon to display its content.

Drive information ( P. 87)

Select to display various drive data.

LDA (Lane Departure Alert) (if equipped) ( P. 190)

Select to display the operational status of the LDA.

Navigation system-linked display (if equipped)

Select to display the following navigation system-linked information.

• Route guidance
• Compass display (north-up display/heading-up display)

Warning message display ( P. 411)

Select to display warning messages and measures to be taken if a malfunction is detected.

Settings display ( P. 89)

Select to change the meter display settings and other settings.

Trip information/Meter light control

Changing the display

To change the displayed item, press the "TRIP" switch.

Each time the switch is pressed, the displayed item will be changed.

◆ Display items

Odometer

Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven.

- Trip meter A/trip meter B

Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter was last reset. Trip meters A and B can be used to record and display different distances independently.

To reset, display the desired trip meter and press and hold the "TRIP" switch.

■ Meter light control

Displays the meter light control display.

• The brightness of the meters can be adjusted individually for day mode and night mode*.
• To adjust the brightness, display the meter light control display and press and hold the "TRIP" switch.

*: Day mode and night mode: →P.89

Menu icons

◆ Operating the meter control switches

The multi-information display is operated using the meter control switches.

① < >: Select menu icons ^ ∨: Change displayed item, scroll up/down the screen and move the cursor up/down

② Press: Enter/Set Press and hold: Reset
③ Return to the previous screen

Drive information

■ Drive information 1/Drive information 2

Displays drive information such as the following:

●Drive information 1
- Current fuel consumption
• Average fuel economy (after reset)
●Drive information 2
• Distance (driving range)
• Average vehicle speed (after reset)

Displayed items (listed below) can be changed on the settings display. (→P. 89)

Item Content
Current fuel consumption	Displays instantaneous current fuel consumption
Average fuel economy (after reset)	Displays average fuel consumption since display reset*1, 2
Average fuel economy (after start)	Displays average fuel consumption since hybrid system start*2
Average fuel economy (after refuel)	Displays average fuel consumption since refuel*2, 3
Average vehicle speed (after reset)	Displays average vehicle speed since display reset*1
Average vehicle speed (after start)	Displays average vehicle speed since hybrid system start
Elapsed time (after reset)	Displays elapsed time since display reset*1
Elapsed time (after start)	Displays elapsed time since hybrid system start
Distance (driving range)	Displays driving range with remaining fuel*3, 4
Distance (after start)	Displays drive distance since vehicle start
Blank No item

*1: To reset, display the desired item and press and hold Ⓞ switch. If both displayed items are resettable, a reset selection screen will appear.
*2: Use the displayed fuel consumption as a reference.
*3: When only a small amount of fuel is added to the tank, the display may not be updated.

When refueling, turn the power switch off. If the vehicle is refueled without turning the power switch off, the display may not be updated.

*4: This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption. As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed.

■ Energy monitor

→P.91

Blank (No items)

Displays no drive information items.

Settings display

■ LDA (Lane Departure Alert) warning sensitivity (if equipped)

LDA warning sensitivity can be set to 2 different levels.

■ EV Indicator

Select to set the EV indicator on/off.

Units

Select to change the units of measure displayed on the multi-information display.

■ Drive information 1/Drive information 2

Select to select up to 2 items that will be displayed on the Drive information 1 screen and Drive information 2 screen respectively. (→P. 87)

■ Pop-up display (if equipped)

Select to set the following pop-up displays on/off.

- Route guidance display of the navigation system-linked system

■ Initialize Display

Select to reset the meter display settings. ( P. 458)

■Brightness of the meters (day mode and night mode)

●The brightness of the meters are changed between day mode and night mode.

• Day mode: When the tail lights are off
• Night mode: When the tail lights are on
- When in night mode, the brightness will be reduced slightly unless the meters are set to the maximum brightness level.

■ Suspension of the settings display

● While driving, the multi-information display cannot be changed to setting mode. Before changing the settings, stop the vehicle in a safe place.

In the following situations, operation of some of the settings display may be temporarily suspended.

• When a warning message appears on the multi-information display
• When the vehicle begins to move

■ When disconnecting and reconnecting 12-volt battery terminals

The drive information data will be reset.

Liquid crystal display

Small spots or light spots may appear on the display. This phenomenon is characteristic of liquid crystal displays, and there is no problem continuing to use the display.

WARNING

■Caution for use while driving

• When operating the multi-information display while driving, pay extra attention to the safety of the area around the vehicle.
• Do not look continuously at the multi-information display while driving as you may fail to see pedestrians, objects on the road, etc. ahead of the vehicle.

■Cautions during setting up the display

As the hybrid system needs to be operating during setting up the display, ensure that the vehicle is parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed area such as a garage, exhaust gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO) may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

NOTICE

■While setting up the display

To prevent 12-volt battery discharge, ensure that the hybrid system is operating while setting up the display features.

Energy monitor/consumption screen

You can view the status of your hybrid system on the multi-information display, audio system screen.

① Multimedia or navigation system
② Multi-information display

Energy monitor

Multimedia system with "CAR" button

Press the "CAR" button.

If the "Trip information" or "Past record" screen is displayed, select "Energy".

Multimedia system with "APPS" button and navigation system

1 Press the "APPS" button.
2 Touch “Eco” on the “Apps” screen.

If the "Trip information" or "Past record" screen is displayed, select "Energy".

▶ Multi-information display

Press or of the meter control switches and select, and then press or to select the energy monitor display.

	Multimedia or navigation system	Multi-information display
When the vehicle is powered by the electric motor (traction motor)
When the vehicle is powered by the gasoline engine
When the vehicle is powered by both the gasoline engine and the electric motor (traction motor)
When the vehicle is charging the hybrid battery (traction battery)
When there is no energy flow
Hybrid battery (traction battery) status	Low Full

These images are examples only.

Fuel consumption (multimedia or navigation system)

- Trip information

Multimedia system with "CAR" button

Press the "CAR" button.

If the "Energy Monitor" or "Past record" screen is displayed, select "Trip information".

Multimedia system with "APPS" button and navigation system

1 Press the "APPS" button.
2 Touch "Eco" on the "Apps" screen.

If the "Energy Monitor" or "Past record" screen is displayed, select "Trip information".

① Resetting the consumption data
② Fuel consumption in the past 15 minutes
③ Regenerated energy in the past 15 minutes

One symbol indicates 30 Wh.

Up to 5 symbols are shown.

CTH21AP524

④ Average vehicle speed since the hybrid system was started
⑤ Elapsed time since the hybrid system was started
⑥ Cruising range

This image is an example only, and may vary slightly from actual conditions.

Past record

Multimedia system with "CAR" button

Press the "CAR" button.

If the “Energy Monitor” or “Trip information” screen is displayed, select “Past record”.

Multimedia system with "APPS" button and navigation system

1 Press the "APPS" button.

2 Touch "Eco" on the "Apps" screen.

If the “Energy Monitor” or “Trip information” screen is displayed, select “Past record”.

① Resetting the past record data

② Best recorded fuel consumption

③ Average fuel consumption

④ Previous fuel consumption record

⑤ Updating the average fuel consumption data

The average fuel consumption history is divided by color into past averages and the average fuel consumption since the last updated. Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.

The image is example only, and may vary slightly from actual conditions.

■ Updating the past record data

Update the average fuel consumption by selecting "Update" to measure the current fuel consumption again.

■ Resetting the data

The fuel consumption data can be deleted by selecting "Clear".

Cruising range

Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be driven with the quantity of fuel remaining.

This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption.

As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed.

Not for Reproduction

Operation of each component

3

3-1. Key information

Keys....98

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Side doors....101

Back door.....105

Smart entry & start system ....110

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Front seats....117

Rear seats 119

Head restraints .....121

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

Steering wheel....123

Inside rear view mirror .....125

Outside rear view mirrors ....126

3-5. Opening and closing the windows

Power windows......128

Keys

The keys

The following keys are provided with the vehicle.

① Electronic keys

• Operating the smart entry & start system (→P. 110)
• Operating the wireless remote control function (→P. 98)

② Mechanical keys
③ Key number plate

Wireless remote control

① Locks all the doors ( P. 101)
② Unlocks all the doors ( P. 101)

Using the mechanical key

To take out the mechanical key, push the release button and take the key out.

The mechanical key can only be inserted in one direction, as the key only has grooves on one side. If the key cannot be inserted in a lock cylinder, turn it over and reattempt to insert it.

Diagram showing a car door with a logo and two arrows indicating disassembly or disassembly (no text or symbols present)

After using the mechanical key, store it in the electronic key. Carry the mechanical key together with the electronic key. If the electronic key battery is depleted or the entry function does not operate properly, you will need the mechanical key. ( P. 431)

If you lose your keys

New genuine keys can be made by your Toyota dealer using the mechanical key and the key number stamped on your key number plate. Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle.

■When riding in an aircraft

When bringing key with wireless remote control function onto an aircraft, make sure you do not press any buttons on the key while inside the aircraft cabin. If you are carrying the key in your bag, etc., ensure that the buttons are not likely to be pressed accidentally. Pressing a button may cause the key to emit radio waves that could interfere with the operation of the aircraft.

Conditions affecting the operation of the smart entry & start system or wireless remote control

→P. 113

■Key battery depletion

●The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years.
- If the battery becomes low, an alarm will sound in the cabin when the hybrid system stops.
- As the electronic key always receives radio waves, the battery will become depleted even if the electronic key is not used. The following symptoms indicate that the electronic key battery may be depleted. Replace the battery when necessary. (→P. 381)
- The smart entry & start system or the wireless remote control does not operate.
- The detection area becomes smaller.
- The LED indicator on the key surface does not turn on.

- To avoid serious deterioration, do not leave the electronic key within 1 m (3 ft.) of the following electrical appliances that produce a magnetic field:

• TVs
• Personal computers
- Cellular phones, cordless phones and battery chargers
- Recharging cellular phones or cordless phones
- Table lamps
- Induction cookers

When the key battery is fully depleted

→P. 381

Confirmation of the registered key number

The number of keys already registered to the vehicle can be confirmed. Ask your Toyota dealer for details.

If a wrong key is used

The key cylinder rotates freely, isolated from the internal mechanism.

Customization

Settings (e.g. wireless remote control system) can be changed.

• Do not drop the keys, subject them to strong shocks or bend them.
• Do not expose the keys to high temperatures for long periods of time.
• Do not get the keys wet or wash them in an ultrasonic washer etc.
• Do not attach metallic or magnetic materials to the keys or place the keys close to such materials.
• Do not disassemble the keys.
• Do not attach a sticker or anything else to the surface of the electronic key.
• Do not place the keys near objects that produce magnetic fields, such as TVs, audio systems and induction cookers, or medical electrical equipment, such as low-frequency therapy equipment.

■Carrying the electronic key on your person

Carry the electronic key 10 cm (3.9 in.) or more away from electric appliances that are turned on. Radio waves emitted from electric appliances within 10 cm (3.9 in.) of the electronic key may interfere with the key, causing the key to not function properly.

In case of a smart entry & start system malfunction or other key-related problems

Take your vehicle with all the electronic keys provided with your vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

When an electronic key is lost

If the electronic key remains lost, the risk of vehicle theft increases significantly. Visit your Toyota dealer immediately with all remaining electronic keys that was provided with your vehicle.

Side doors

Unlocking and locking the doors from the outside

Entry function

Carry the electronic key to enable this function.

① Grip the front door handle to unlock all the doors.

Make sure to touch the sensor on the back of the handle.

The doors cannot be unlocked for 3 seconds after the doors are locked.

② Touch the lock sensor (the indentation on the side of the front door handle) to lock all the doors.

Check that the door is securely locked.

◆ Wireless remote control

① Locks all the doors Check that the door is securely locked.

② Unlocks all the doors

Operation signals

A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have been locked/unlocked using the entry function or wireless remote control. (Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice)

■Security feature

If a door is not opened within approximately 30 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked using the entry function or wireless remote control, the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again. (However, depending on the location of the electronic key, the key may be detected as being in the vehicle. In this case, vehicle may be unlocked.)

- When the door cannot be locked by the lock sensor on the surface of the front door handle

Use your palm to touch the lock sensor.

Door lock buzzer

If an attempt to lock the doors using the entry function or wireless remote control is made when a door is not fully closed, a buzzer will sound continuously for 5 seconds. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock the doors again.

If the smart entry & start system or the wireless remote control does not operate properly

Use the mechanical key to lock and unlock the doors. ( P. 431)

Replace the key battery with a new one if it is depleted. ( P. 381)

Unlocking and locking the doors from the inside

Door lock switch

① Locks all the doors
② Unlocks all the doors

Inside lock buttons

① Locks the door
② Unlocks the door
The driver's door can be opened by pulling the inside handle even if the lock button is in the lock position.

Locking the front doors from the outside without a key

1 Move the inside lock button to the lock position.
2 Close the door while pulling the door handle.

The door cannot be locked if the power switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode, or the electronic key is left inside the vehicle.

The key may not be detected correctly and the door may be locked.

Rear door child-protector lock

The door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle when the lock is set.

① Unlock
② Lock

These locks can be set to prevent children from opening the rear doors. Push down on each rear door switch to lock both rear doors.

Open door warning buzzer

If a door or the back door is not fully closed, a buzzer will sound when the vehicle speed reaches 5 km/h (3 mph).

The open door(s) or back door is indicated on the multi-information display.

Conditions affecting the operation of the smart entry & start system or wireless remote control

→P. 113

WARNING

■To prevent an accident

Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle.

Failure to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant throwing out of the vehicle, resulting in death or serious injury.

●Ensure that all doors are properly closed and locked.
- Do not pull the inside handle of the doors while driving.
Be especially careful for the driver's door, as the door may be opened even if the inside lock button is in the locked position.
- Set the rear door child-protector locks when children are seated in the rear seats.

Back door

The back door can be locked/unlocked and opened by the following procedures.

Unlocking and locking the back door

■ Door lock switch

→P. 103

Entry function

① Press the button to unlock the back door.

The door cannot be unlocked for 3 seconds after the door is locked.

② Press the button to lock the back door.

Check that the door is securely locked.

■ Wireless remote control

→P. 101

Opening the back door

Raise the back door while pushing up the back door opener switch.

The back door cannot be closed immediately after the back door opener switch is pushed.

Operation signals

→P. 102

Open door warning buzzer

If a door or the back door is not fully closed, a buzzer will sound when the vehicle speed reaches 5 km/h (3 mph).

The open door(s) or back door is indicated on the multi-information display.

■When closing the back door

Lower the back door using the back door handle, and make sure to push the back door down from the outside to close it.

Be careful not to pull the back door sideways when closing the back door with the handle.

Technical line drawing of a car rearview structure with no visible text or symbols

Luggage compartment light

The luggage compartment light turns on when the back door is opened.

If the back door opener is inoperative

The back door can be operated from the inside.

1 Using a screwdriver, remove the cover.

To protect the cover, place a rag between the flathead screwdriver and the cover as shown in the illustration.

2 Move the lever.

WARNING

■Caution while driving

• Keep the back door closed while driving.
  If the back door is left open, it may hit near-by objects while driving or luggage may be unexpectedly thrown out, causing an accident.
  In addition, exhaust gases may enter the vehicle, causing death or a serious health hazard. Make sure to close the back door before driving.
  Before driving the vehicle, make sure that the back door is fully closed. If the back door is not fully closed, it may open unexpectedly while driving, causing an accident.
  ●Never let anyone sit in the luggage compartment. In the event of sudden braking or a collision, they are susceptible to death or serious injury.

■When children are in the vehicle

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

- Do not allow children to play in the luggage compartment. If a child is accidentally locked in the luggage compartment, they could have heat exhaustion or other injuries.

- Do not allow a child to open or close the back door. Doing so may cause the back door to move unexpectedly, or cause the child's hands, head, or neck to be caught by the closing back door.

WARNING

■Operating the back door

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause parts of the body to be caught, resulting in death or serious injury.

• Remove any heavy loads, such as snow and ice, from the back door before opening it. Failure to do so may cause the back door to suddenly shut again after it is opened.
• When opening or closing the back door, thoroughly check to make sure the surrounding area is safe.
• If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that the back door is about to open or close.
• Use caution when opening or closing the back door in windy weather as it may move abruptly in strong wind.

The back door may suddenly shut if it is not opened fully. It is more difficult to open or close the back door on an incline than on a level surface, so beware of the back door unexpectedly opening or closing by itself. Make sure that the back door is fully open and secure before using the luggage compartment.

- When closing the back door, take extra care to prevent your fingers etc. from being caught.

- When closing the back door, make sure to press it lightly on its outer surface. If the back door handle is used to fully close the back door, it may result in hands or arms being caught.

- Do not pull on the back door damper stay to close the back door, and do not hang on the back door damper stay. Doing so may cause hands to be caught or the back door damper stay to break, causing an accident.

- If a bicycle carrier or similar heavy object is attached to the back door, it may suddenly shut again after being opened, causing someone's hands, head or neck to be caught and injured. When installing an accessory part to the back door, using a genuine Toyota part is recommended.

NOTICE

■ Back door damper stays

The back door is equipped with damper stays that hold the back door in place.

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause damage to the back door damper stay, resulting in malfunction.

• Do not attach any foreign objects, such as stickers, plastic sheets, or adhesives to the damper stay rod.
• Do not touch the damper stay rod with gloves or other fabric items.
• Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Toyota parts to the back door.
• Do not place your hand on the damper stay or apply lateral forces to it.

Diagram of a car interior showing the hood and side panel with arrows indicating movement or force (no text or symbols present)

Smart entry & start system

The following operations can be performed simply by carrying the electronic key on your person, for example in your pocket. The driver should always carry the electronic key.

• Locks and unlocks the doors (→P. 101)
• Locks and unlocks the back door (→P. 105)
  ● Starts the hybrid system ( P. 142)

Antenna location

① Antennas outside the cabin
② Antennas inside the cabin
③ Antenna inside the luggage compartment
④ Antenna outside the luggage compartment

■ Effective range (areas within which the electronic key is detected)

When locking or unlocking the doors

The system can be operated when the electronic key is within about 0.7 m (2.3 ft.) of an outside front door handle and back door. (Only the doors detecting the key can be operated.)

Top-down schematic of a car showing internal compartments and structural elements (no text or symbols)

When starting the hybrid system or changing power switch modes The system can be operated when the electronic key is inside the vehicle.

■Alarms and warning indicators

A combination of exterior and interior buzzers as well as warning messages shown on the multi-information display are used to prevent theft of the vehicle and accidents resulting from erroneous operation. Take appropriate measures based on the displayed message. (→P. 411)

When only an alarm sounds, circumstances and correction procedures are as follows.

Alarm Situation	Correction procedure
Exterior buzzer sounds once for 5 seconds	An attempt was made to lock the vehicle while a door was open.	Close all of the doors and lock the doors again.
Interior buzzer sounds continuously	The power switch was turned to ACCESSORY mode while the driver's door was open (or the driver's door was opened while the power switch was in ACCESSORY mode).	Turn the power switch off and close the driver's door.

- When “Smart Entry & Start System Malfunction See Owner’s Manual” is displayed on the multi-information display

The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

Battery-saving function

The battery-saving function will be activated in order to prevent the electronic key battery and the 12-volt battery from being discharged while the vehicle is not operated for a long time.

• In the following situations, the smart entry & start system may take some time to unlock the doors.
• The electronic key has been left within approximately 2 m (6 ft.) of the outside of the vehicle for 10 minutes or longer.
• The smart entry & start system has not been used for 5 days or longer.
• If the smart entry & start system has not been used for 14 days or longer, the doors cannot be unlocked from any door except the driver's door. In this case, hold the driver's door handle, or use the wireless remote control or mechanical key to unlock the doors.

Electronic key battery-saving function

When battery-saving mode is set, battery depletion is minimized by stopping the electronic key from receiving radio waves.

Press twice while pressing and hold-

ing 🔒 Confirm that the electronic key indicator flashes 4 times.

While the battery-saving mode is set, the smart entry & start system cannot be used. To cancel the function, press any of the electronic key buttons.

■Conditions affecting operation

The smart entry & start system uses weak radio waves. In the following situations, the communication between the electronic key and the vehicle may be affected, preventing the smart entry & start system, wireless remote control and immobilizer system from operating properly.

(Ways of coping: →P. 431)

• When the electronic key battery is depleted
• Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise
• When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wireless communication device

• When the electronic key is in contact with, or is covered by the following metallic objects

• Cards to which aluminum foil is attached
  • Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil inside
  • Metallic wallets or bags

• Coins
• Hand warmers made of metal
  • Media such as CDs and DVDs

- When other wireless keys (that emit radio waves) are being used nearby

- When carrying the electronic key together with the following devices that emit radio waves

• Another vehicle's electronic key or a wireless key that emits radio waves
  • Personal computers or personal digital assistants (PDAs)
  • Digital audio players
• Portable game systems

- If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to the rear window

- When the electronic key is placed near a battery charger or electronic devices

■Note for the entry function

● Even when the electronic key is within the effective range (detection areas), the system may not operate properly in the following cases:

- The electronic key is too close to the window or outside door handle, near the ground, or in a high place when the doors are locked or unlocked.

- The electronic key is near the ground or in a high place, or too close to the rear bumper center when the back door is opened.

- The electronic key is on the instrument panel, luggage cover or floor, or in the door pockets or glove box when the hybrid system is started or power switch modes are changed.

- Do not leave the electronic key on top of the instrument panel or near the door pockets when exiting the vehicle. Depending on the radio wave reception conditions, it may be detected by the antenna outside the cabin and the door will become lockable from the outside, possibly trapping the electronic key inside the vehicle.

- As long as the electronic key is within the effective range, the doors may be locked or unlocked by anyone. However, only the doors detecting the electronic key can be used to unlock the vehicle.

● Even if the electronic key is not inside the vehicle, it may be possible to start the hybrid system if the electronic key is near the window.

- The doors may unlock or lock if a large amount of water splashes on the door handle, such as in the rain or in a car wash when the electronic key is within the effective range. (The doors will automatically be locked after approximately 30 seconds if the doors are not opened and closed.)

- If the wireless remote control is used to lock the doors when the electronic key is near the vehicle, there is a possibility that the door may not be unlocked by the entry function. (Use the wireless remote control to unlock the doors.)

- Touching the door lock or unlock sensor while wearing gloves may prevent lock or unlock operation.

- When the lock operation is performed using the lock sensor, recognition signals will be shown up to two consecutive times. After this, no recognition signals will be given.

- If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the effective range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In that case, follow the following correction procedures to wash the vehicle:

- Place the electronic key in a location 2 m (6 ft.) or more away from the vehicle. (Take care to ensure that the key is not stolen.)

- Set the electronic key to battery-saving mode to disable the smart entry & start system. (→P. 112)

• If the electronic key is inside the vehicle and a door handle becomes wet during a car wash, a message may be shown on the multi-information display and a buzzer will sound outside the vehicle. To turn off the alarm, lock all the doors.
  ●The lock sensor may not work properly if it comes into contact with ice, snow, mud, etc. Clean the lock sensor and attempt to operate it again.
• A sudden handle operation or a handle operation immediately after entering the effective range may prevent the doors from being unlocked. Touch the door unlock sensor and check that the doors are unlocked before pulling the door handle again.
• If there is another electronic key in the detection area, it may take slightly longer to unlock the doors after the door handle is gripped.

■When the vehicle is not driven for extended periods

• To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not leave the electronic key within 2 m (6 ft.) of the vehicle.
  The smart entry & start system can be deactivated in advance. (→P. 457)

■To operate the system properly

Make sure to carry the electronic key when operating the system. Do not get the electronic key too close to the vehicle when operating the system from the outside of the vehicle.

Depending on the position and holding condition of the electronic key, the key may not be detected correctly and the system may not operate properly. (The alarm may go off accidentally, or the door lock prevention function may not operate.)

If the smart entry & start system does not operate properly

• Locking and unlocking the doors: Use the mechanical key. (→P. 431)
  Starting the hybrid system: →P. 432

Customization

Settings (e.g. smart entry & start system) can be changed.

If the smart entry & start system has been deactivated in a customized setting

Locking and unlocking the doors:

Use the wireless remote control or mechanical key. ( P. 101, 431)

Starting the hybrid system and changing power switch modes: →P. 432
Stopping the hybrid system: →P. 143

WARNING

■ Caution regarding interference with electronic devices

●People with implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should maintain a reasonable distance between themselves and the smart entry & start system antennas. (→P. 110) The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. If necessary, the entry function can be disabled. Ask your Toyota dealer for details, such as the frequency of radio waves and timing of the emitted radio waves. Then, consult your doctor to see if you should disable the entry function.

- Users of any electrical medical device other than implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation under the influence of radio waves. Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical devices.

Ask your Toyota dealer for details on disabling the entry function.

Front seats

Adjustment procedure

① Seat position adjustment lever
② Seatback angle adjustment lever
③ Vertical height adjustment lever (If equipped)

WARNING

■When adjusting the seat position

●Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passengers are not injured by the moving seat.
- Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid injury.
Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.
Make sure to leave enough space around the feet so they do not get stuck.

Seat adjustment

●Be careful that the seat does not hit passengers or luggage.
●To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a collision, do not recline the seat more than necessary.
If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen, or your neck may contact the shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.
Adjustments should not be made while driving as the seat may unexpectedly move and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
●After adjusting the seat, make sure that the seat is locked in position.

Rear seats

The seatbacks of the rear seats can be folded down.

Folding down the rear seatbacks

1 Move the front seats forward. ( P. 117)
2 Stow the rear armrest. ( P. 346)
3 Stow the rear center seat belt buckle.

Diagram showing two car seatbelt configurations in a vehicle, with one highlighted and the other on the ground (no text or symbols)

4 Lower the head restraints to the lowest position. (→P. 121)
5 Pull the seatback lock release lever and fold the seatback down.

Each seatback may be folded separately.

WARNING

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

■When folding the rear seatbacks down

• Do not fold the seatbacks down while driving.
• Stop the vehicle on level ground, set the parking brake and set the shift position to P.
• Do not allow anyone to sit on a folded seatback or in the luggage compartment while driving.
• Do not allow children to enter the luggage compartment.
• Do not allow anyone to sit on the rear center seat if the rear right seat is folded down, as the seat belt buckle for the rear center seat belt is then concealed under the folded seat and cannot be used.
  ●Be careful not to get your hand caught when folding the rear seatbacks.
• Adjust the position of the front seats before folding down the rear seatbacks so that the front seats do not interfere with the rear seatbacks when folding down the rear seatbacks.

■ After returning the rear seatback to the upright position

● Make sure that the seatback is securely locked in position by lightly pushing it back and forth.

If the seatback is not securely locked, the red marking will be visible on the seatback lock release lever. Make sure that the red marking is not visible.

- Check that the seat belts are not twisted or caught in the seatback.

If the seat belt gets caught between the seatback's securing hook and latch, it may damage the seat belt.

Head restraints

Head restraints are provided for all seats.

Vertical adjustment

① Up

Pull the head restraints up.

② Down

Push the head restraint down while pressing the lock release button.

Removing the head restraints

Pull the head restraint up while pressing the lock release button.

Installing the head restraints

Front seats

Align the head restraint with the installation holes and push it down to the lock position.

Press and hold the lock release button when lowering the head restraint.

Rear seats

Align the head restraint with the installation holes and push it down to the lowest lock position while pressing the lock release button.

■Adjusting the height of the head restraints

Make sure that the head restraints are adjusted so that the center of the head restraint is closest to the top of your ears.

Side profile illustration of a human head and neck with a dashed line indicating measurement or alignment (no text or symbols)

■Adjusting the rear seat head restraint

Always raise the head restraint one level from the stowed position when using.

WARNING

■Head restraint precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

● Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat.
- Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times.
● After adjusting the head restraints, push down on them and make sure they are locked in position.
- Do not drive with the head restraints removed.

Steering wheel

Adjustment procedure

1 Hold the steering wheel and push the lever down.

Interior view of a car showing steering wheel and dashboard, with a close-up inset of the steering wheel (no text or symbols)

2 Adjust to the ideal position by moving the steering wheel horizontally and vertically.

After adjustment, pull the lever up to secure the steering wheel.

Diagram of a car interior showing steering wheel and dashboard with directional arrows (no text or symbols)

Horn

To sound the horn, press on or close to the mark.

WARNING

■Caution while driving

Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.

Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

■After adjusting the steering wheel

Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked.

Otherwise, the steering wheel may move suddenly, possibly causing an accident, and resulting in death or serious injury. Also, the horn may not sound if the steering wheel is not securely locked.

Inside rear view mirror

The rear view mirror's position can be adjusted to enable sufficient confirmation of the rear view.

Adjusting the height of rear view mirror

The height of the rear view mirror can be adjusted to suit your driving posture.

Adjust the height of the rear view mirror by moving it up and down.

Anti-glare function

Reflected light from the headlights of vehicles behind can be reduced by operating the lever.

① Normal position
② Anti-glare position

WARNING

Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving. Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

Outside rear view mirrors

Adjustment procedure

1 To select a mirror to adjust, press the switch.

① Left
② Right

2 To adjust the mirror, press the switch.

① Up
② Right
③ Down
④ Left

Manually folding the mirrors

Push the mirror back in the direction of the rear of the vehicle.

Diagram of a car's seat and side arm with a pink curved arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

■Mirror angle can be adjusted when

The power switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode.

WARNING

■ Important points while driving

Observe the following precautions while driving.

Failure to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

• Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.
• Do not drive with the mirrors folded.
  ● Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly adjusted before driving.

■When a mirror is moving

To avoid personal injury and mirror malfunction, be careful not to get your hand caught by the moving mirror.

Power windows

Opening and closing procedures

The power windows can be opened and closed using the switches.

Operating the switch moves the windows as follows:

① Closing
② One-touch closing (driver's window only)*
③ Opening
④ One-touch opening (driver's window only)*

*: To stop the window partway, operate the switch in the opposite direction.

Window lock switch

Press the switch to lock the passenger window switches.

Use this switch to prevent children from accidentally opening or closing a passenger window.

The power windows can be operated when

The power switch is in ON mode.

Operating the power windows after turning the hybrid system off

The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds after the power switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off. They cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.

Jam protection function (driver's window only)

If an object becomes jammed between the window and the window frame while the window is closing, window movement is stopped and the window is opened slightly.

- Catch protection function (driver's window only)

If an object becomes caught between the door and window while the window is opening, window movement is stopped.

- When the window cannot be opened or closed (driver's window only)

When the jam protection function or catch protection function operates unusually and the door window cannot be opened or closed, perform the following operations with the power window switch of that door.

• Stop the vehicle. With the power switch in ON mode, within 4 seconds of the jam protection function or catch protection function activating, continuously operate the power window switch in the one-touch closing direction or one-touch opening direction so that the door window can be opened and closed.
• If the door window cannot be opened and closed even when performing the above operations, perform the following procedure for function initialization.

1 Turn the power switch to ON mode.
2 Pull and hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing direction and completely close the door window.
3 Release the power window switch for a moment, resume pulling the switch in the one-touch closing direction, and hold it there for approximately 6 seconds or more.
4 Press and hold the power window switch in the one-touch opening direction. After the door window is completely opened, continue holding the switch for an additional 1 second or more.
5 Release the power window switch for a moment, resume pushing the switch in the one-touch opening direction, and hold it there for approximately 4 seconds or more.
6 Pull and hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing direction again. After the door window is completely closed, continue holding the switch for a further 1 second or more.

If you release the switch while the window is moving, start again from the beginning.

If the window reverses and cannot be fully closed or opened, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

■Closing the windows

The driver is responsible for all the power window operations, including the operation for the passengers. In order to prevent accidental operation, especially by a child, do not let a child operate the power windows. It is possible for children and other passengers to have body parts caught in the power window. Also, when riding with a child, it is recommended to use the window lock switch. (→P. 128)
- Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a position where it could be caught when a window is being operated.
- When exiting the vehicle, turn the power switch off, carry the key and exit the vehicle along with the child. There may be accidental operation, due to mischief, etc., that may possibly lead to an accident.

■Jam protection function (driver's window only)

● Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection function.
●The jam protection function may not work if something gets jammed just before the window is fully closed. Be careful not to get any part of your body jammed in the window.

- Catch protection function (driver's window only)

●Never use any part of your body or clothing to intentionally activate the catch protection function.
●The catch protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the window is fully opened. Be careful not to get any part of your body or clothing caught in the window.

Driving

4

4-1. Before driving

Driving the vehicle .....132

Cargo and luggage......140

Trailer towing....141

4-2. Driving procedures

Power (ignition) switch ....142

EV drive mode......147

Hybrid transmission......149

Turn signal lever......157

Parking brake ....158

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Headlight switch .....159

Fog light switch....163

Windshield wipers and washer....164

Rear window wiper and washer....166

4-4. Refueling

Opening the fuel tank cap....168

4-5. Toyota Safety Sense

Toyota Safety Sense .....171

PCS (Pre-Collision System) 177

LDA (Lane Departure Alert)....190

Automatic High Beam......195

4-6. Using the driving support systems

Cruise control....199

Rear view monitor system 202

Driving assist systems ....211

4-7. Driving tips

Hybrid vehicle driving tips ....217

Winter driving tips......220

Driving the vehicle

The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driving:

Starting the hybrid system

→P. 142

Driving

1 With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift position to D. (→P. 149)
Check that the shift position indicator shows D.
2 Release the parking brake. ( P. 158)
3 Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.

Stopping

1 With the shift position in D, depress the brake pedal.
2 If necessary, set the parking brake.
If the vehicle is to be stopped for an extended period of time, shift the shift position to P. ( P. 149)

Parking the vehicle

1 Stop the vehicle completely.
2 Set the parking brake. ( P. 158)
3 Shift the shift position to P. ( P. 149)
Check that the shift position indicator shows P.
4 Press the power switch to stop the hybrid system.
5 Slowly release the brake pedal.
6 Lock the door, making sure that you have the electronic key on your person.

If parking on a hill, block the wheels as needed.

Starting off on a steep uphill

1 Firmly set the parking brake with the brake pedal depressed, and then shift the shift position to D.
2 Release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal.
3 Release the parking brake.

■When starting off on an uphill

The hill-start assist control will activate. ( P. 211)

■For fuel-efficient driving

Keep in mind that hybrid vehicles are similar to conventional vehicles, and it is necessary to refrain from activities such as sudden acceleration. ( P. 217)

- Driving in the rain

• Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the windows may become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery.
• Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be especially slippery.
• Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain, because there may be a layer of water between the tires and the road surface, preventing the steering and brakes from operating properly.

■Breaking in your new Toyota

To extend the life of the vehicle, observing the following precautions is recommended:

●For the first 300 km (200 miles):
Avoid sudden stops.
●For the first 2000 km (1200 miles):
- Do not drive at extremely high speeds.
- Avoid sudden acceleration.
- Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods.

■Operating your vehicle in a foreign country

Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability of the correct fuel. ( P. 448)

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

■When starting the vehicle

Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the "READY" indicator is illuminated. This prevents the vehicle from creeping.

■When driving the vehicle

- Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accelerator pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal.

• Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake pedal will result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident.
• When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to a difficulty in operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly.
• Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the vehicle only slightly. This allows you to depress the brake and accelerator pedals properly.
• Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake pedal using your left foot may delay response in an emergency, resulting in an accident.

The driver should pay extra attention to pedestrians when the vehicle is powered only by the electric motor (traction motor). As there is no engine noise, the pedestrians may misjudge the vehicle's movement.

- Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials. The exhaust system and exhaust gases can be extremely hot. These hot parts may cause a fire if there is any flammable material nearby.

During normal driving, do not turn off the hybrid system. Turning the hybrid system off while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, however, power assist to the steering will be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer smoothly, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

In the event of an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the vehicle in the normal way: →P. 399

- Use engine braking (shift position B) to maintain a safe speed when driving down a steep hill.

Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose effectiveness. ( P. 149)

- Do not adjust the positions of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or outside rear view mirrors while driving.

Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control.

●Always check that all passengers' arms, heads or other parts of their body are not outside the vehicle.

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

■When driving on slippery road surfaces

●Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and reduce your ability to control the vehicle.
● Sudden acceleration, engine braking due to shifting, or changes in engine speed could cause the vehicle to skid.
●After driving through a puddle, lightly depress the brake pedal to make sure that the brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent the brakes from functioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet and not functioning properly, steering control may be affected.

■When changing the shift position

• Do not let the vehicle roll backwards while a forward driving position is selected, or roll forward while R is selected.
  Doing so may result in an accident or damage to the vehicle.

- Do not shift the shift position to P while the vehicle is moving.

Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.

- Do not shift the shift position to R while the vehicle is moving forward. Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.

- Do not shift the shift position to a driving position while the vehicle is moving backward.

Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.

●Changing the shift position to N while the vehicle is moving will disengage the hybrid system. Engine braking is not available with the hybrid system disengaged.

- Be careful not to change the shift position with the accelerator pedal depressed.

Changing the shift position to any position other than P or N may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident and result in death or serious injury.

After changing the shift position, make sure to check the current shift position using the shift position indicator. ( P. 149)

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

■ If you hear a squealing or scraping noise (brake pad wear indicators)

Have the brake pads checked and replaced by your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

Rotor damage may result if the pads are not replaced when needed.

It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads and/or those of the brake discs are exceeded.

■When the vehicle is stopped

• Do not depress the accelerator pedal unnecessarily.
  If a shift position other than P or N is selected, the vehicle may accelerate suddenly and unexpectedly, causing an accident.
  In order to prevent accidents due to the vehicle rolling away, always keep depressing the brake pedal while stopped with the "READY" indicator is illuminated. Apply the parking brake as necessary.
• If the vehicle is stopped on an incline, in order to prevent accidents caused by the vehicle rolling forward or backward, always depress the brake pedal and securely apply the parking brake as needed.
  ●Avoid revving or racing the engine.
  Running the engine at high speed while the vehicle is stopped may cause the exhaust system to overheat, which could result in a fire if combustible material is nearby.

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

■When the vehicle is parked

- Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in the vehicle when it is in the sun.

Doing so may result in the following:

• Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a fire.
• The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and plastic material of glasses to deform or crack.

• Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the interior of the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehicle's electrical components.

• Do not leave cigarette lighters in the vehicle. If a cigarette lighter is in a place such as the glove box or on the floor, it may be lit accidentally when luggage is loaded or the seat is adjusted, causing a fire.

• Do not attach adhesive discs to the windshield or windows. Do not place containers such as air fresheners on the instrument panel or dashboard. Adhesive discs or containers may act as lenses, causing a fire in the vehicle.
• Do not leave a door or window open if the curved glass is coated with a metallized film such as a silver-colored one. Reflected sunlight may cause the glass to act as a lens, causing a fire.
  ●Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift position to P, stop the hybrid system and lock the vehicle.

Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the "READY" indicator is illuminated.

If the vehicle is parked with the shift position in P but the parking brake is not set, the vehicle may start to move, possibly leading to an accident.

- Do not touch the exhaust pipes while the “READY” indicator is illuminated or immediately after turning the hybrid system off.

Doing so may cause burns.

■When taking a nap in the vehicle

Always turn the hybrid system off. Otherwise, if you accidentally move the shift lever or depress the accelerator pedal, this could cause an accident or fire due to hybrid system overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly ventilated area, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle, leading to death or a serious health hazard.

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

When braking

• When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously.
  Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and this may cause one side of the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also, the parking brake may not securely hold the vehicle.
• If the brake actuator does not operate, do not follow other vehicles closely and avoid hills or sharp turns that require braking.
  In this case, braking is still possible, but the brake pedal should be depressed more firmly than usual. Also, the braking distance will increase. Have your brakes fixed immediately.
  ●The brake system consists of 2 or more individual hydraulic systems; if one of the systems fails, the other(s) will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal should be depressed more firmly than usual and the braking distance will increase. Have your brakes fixed immediately.

If the vehicle becomes stuck

Do not spin the wheels excessively when any of the tires is up in the air, or the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, etc. This may damage the driveline components or propel the vehicle forward or backward, causing an accident.

NOTICE

■When driving the vehicle

• Do not depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time during driving, as this may restrain the hybrid system output.
• Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time to hold the vehicle on a hill.

■When parking the vehicle

Always set the parking brake, and shift the shift position to P. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to move or the vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed.

■ Avoiding damage to vehicle parts

Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for an extended period of time.
Doing so may damage the power steering motor.
- When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid damaging the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.

NOTICE

If you get a flat tire while driving

A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering wheel firmly and gradually depress the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle.

It may be difficult to control your vehicle.
●The vehicle will make abnormal sounds or vibrations.
●The vehicle will lean abnormally.

Information on what to do in case of a flat tire (→P. 419)

■When encountering flooded roads

Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain etc. Doing so may cause the following serious damage to the vehicle:

Engine stalling
●Short in electrical components
●Engine damage caused by water immersion

In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be sure to have your Toyota dealer check the following:

• Brake function
  ● Changes in quantity and quality of engine oil, hybrid transmission fluid, etc.
  ● Lubricant condition for the bearings and suspension joints (where possible), and the function of all joints, bearings, etc.

If the shift control system is damaged by flooding, it may not be possible to shift the shift position to P, or from P to other positions. When the shift position cannot be changed from P to any other position, the front wheels will lock, and you will be unable to tow the vehicle with the front wheels on the ground, as the front wheels may be locked. In this case, transport the vehicle with both front wheels or all four wheels lifted.

Cargo and luggage

Take notice of the following information about storage precautions, cargo capacity and load:

WARNING

■ Things that must not be carried in the luggage compartment

The following things may cause a fire if loaded in the luggage compartment:

●Receptacles containing gasoline
●Aerosol cans

■Storage precautions

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may prevent the pedals from being depressed properly, may block the driver's vision, or may result in items hitting the driver or passengers, possibly causing an accident.

●Stow cargo and luggage in the luggage compartment whenever possible.
- Do not stack cargo and luggage in the luggage compartment higher than the seatbacks.
- Do not place cargo or luggage in or on the following locations.

• At the feet of the driver
• On the front passenger or rear seats (when stacking items)
• On the luggage cover
• On the instrument panel
• On the dashboard

- Secure all items in the occupant compartment.

• When you fold down the rear seats, long items should not be placed directly behind the front seats.
  ●Never allow anyone to ride in the luggage compartment. It is not designed for passengers. They should ride in their seats with their seat belts properly fastened.

Load and distribution

• Do not overload your vehicle.
• Do not apply loads unevenly.

Improper loading may cause deterioration of steering or braking control which may cause death or serious injury.

Trailer towing

Toyota does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Toyota also does not recommend the installation of a tow hitch or the use of a tow hitch carrier for a wheelchair, scooter, bicycle, etc. Your vehicle is not designed for trailer towing or for the use of tow hitch mounted carriers.

Power (ignition) switch

Performing the following operations when carrying the electronic key on your person starts the hybrid system or changes power switch modes.

Starting the hybrid system

1 Check that the parking brake is set.
2 Check that the P shift position is selected.
3 Firmly depress the brake pedal.

will be displayed on the multi-information display.

If it is not displayed, the hybrid system cannot be started.

When the shift position is N, the hybrid system cannot start. Shift the shift position to P when starting the hybrid system. ( P. 151)

4 Press the power switch shortly and firmly.

When operating the power switch, one short, firm press is enough. It is not necessary to press and hold the switch.

If the "READY" indicator turns on, the hybrid system will operate normally.

Continue depressing the brake pedal until the "READY" indicator is illuminated.

The hybrid system can be started from any power switch mode.

5 Check that the "READY" indicator is illuminated. The vehicle will not move when the "READY" indicator is off.

Stopping the hybrid system

1 Stop the vehicle completely.
2 Set the parking brake. ( P. 158)
3 Press the "P" position switch. (→P. 151)

Check that the shift position indicator on the instrument cluster shows P. ( P. 78)

4 Press the power switch.
5 Release the brake pedal and check that "Power On." on the multi-information display is off.

Changing power switch modes

Modes can be changed by pressing the power switch with brake pedal released. (The mode changes each time the switch is pressed.)

Off

The emergency flashers can be used.

ACCESSORY mode

Some electrical components such as the audio system can be used.

"Power On" will be displayed on the multi-information display.

ON mode

All electrical components can be used.

"Power On" will be displayed on the multi-information display.

■ Auto power off function

If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode for more than 20 minutes or ON mode (the hybrid system is not operating) for more than an hour with the P shift position selected, the power switch will automatically turn off. However, this function cannot entirely prevent 12-volt battery discharge. Do not leave the vehicle with the power switch in ACCESSORY or ON mode for long periods of time when the hybrid system is not operating.

■ Sounds and vibrations specific to a hybrid vehicle

→P. 67

Electronic key battery depletion

→P. 99

When the ambient temperature is low, such as during winter driving conditions

When starting the hybrid system, the flashing time of the "READY" indicator may be long. Leave the vehicle as it is until the "READY" indicator is steady on, as steady means the vehicle is able to move.

■Conditions affecting operation

→P. 113

Notes for the entry function

→P. 114

If the hybrid system does not start

● The immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (→P. 75) Contact your Toyota dealer.
- Check that the P position indicator is illuminated. The hybrid system may not start if the P position indicator is not illuminated. “Shift to P Position to Start” will be displayed on the multi-information display.

- When “Smart Entry & Start System Malfunction See Owner’s Manual” is displayed on the multi-information display

The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

If the "READY" indicator does not come on

In the event that the “READY” indicator does not come on even after performing the proper procedures for starting the vehicle, contact your Toyota dealer immediately.

■If the electronic key battery is depleted

→P. 381

■Operation of the power switch

• If the switch is not pressed shortly and firmly, the power switch mode may not change or the hybrid system may not start.
• If attempting to restart the hybrid system immediately after turning the power switch off, the hybrid system may not start in some cases. After turning the power switch off, please wait a few seconds before restarting the hybrid system.

■ Automatic P position selection function

• When the shift position is other than P, pressing the power switch with the vehicle stopped completely will cause the shift position to change to P automatically, and then the power switch will turn off.
• When turning the power switch off from a position other than P, firmly depress the brake pedal and confirm that the shift position* has changed to P before slowly releasing the brake pedal.

*: Even after the instrument panel display has been turned off, the shift position indicator will continue to be displayed for several seconds.

When the shift control system malfunctions

The power switch will not be able to be turned off. In such a case, the switch can be turned off by applying the parking brake.

When the system malfunctions, immediately have your vehicle serviced by your Toyota dealer.

If the smart entry & start system has been deactivated in a customized setting

→P. 431

WARNING

■When starting the hybrid system

Always start the hybrid system while sitting in the driver's seat. Do not depress the accelerator pedal while starting the hybrid system under any circumstances.

Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

■Stopping the hybrid system in an emergency

If you want to stop the hybrid system in an emergency while driving the vehicle, press and hold the power switch for more than 2 seconds, or press it briefly 3 times or more in succession. (→P. 399)

However, do not touch the power switch while driving except in an emergency. Turning the hybrid system off while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, however, power assist to the steering will be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer smoothly, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

NOTICE

■To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

• Do not leave the power switch in ACCESSORY or ON mode for long periods if the hybrid system is not operating.
• If the hybrid system is off, but the indicator on the power switch is illuminated, this indicates that the power switch is still turned on. When exiting the vehicle, always check that the power switch is off.

When starting the hybrid system

If the hybrid system becomes difficult to start, have your vehicle checked by your Toyota dealer immediately.

■ Symptoms indicating a malfunction with the power switch

If the power switch seems to be operating somewhat differently than usual, such as the switch sticking slightly, there may be a malfunction. Contact your Toyota dealer immediately.

EV drive mode

In EV drive mode, electric power is supplied by the hybrid battery (traction battery), and only the electric motor (traction motor) is used to drive the vehicle.

This mode allows you to drive in residential areas early in the morning and late at night, or in indoor parking lots etc. without concern for noises and gas emissions.

Turns EV drive mode on/off

When EV drive mode is turned on, the EV drive mode indicator will come on. Pressing the switch when in EV drive mode will return the vehicle to normal driving (using the gasoline engine and electric motor [traction motor]).

■ Situations in which EV drive mode cannot be turned on

It may not be possible to turn EV drive mode on in the following situations. If it cannot be turned on, a buzzer will sound and a message will be shown on the multi-information display.

●The temperature of the hybrid system is high.
The vehicle has been left in the sun, driven on a hill, driven at high speeds, etc.
●The temperature of the hybrid system is low.
The vehicle has been left in temperatures lower than about 0^ C ( 32^ F) for a long period of time etc.
● The gasoline engine is warming up.
The hybrid battery (traction battery) is low.
The remaining battery level indicated in the “Energy Monitor” display is low. (→P. 92)
● Vehicle speed is high.
●The accelerator pedal is depressed firmly or the vehicle is on a hill etc.
●The windshield defogger is in use.

■ Switching to EV drive mode when the gasoline engine is cold

If the hybrid system is started while the gasoline engine is cold, the gasoline engine will start automatically in order to warm up. In this case, you will become unable to switch to EV drive mode.

After the hybrid system has started and the “READY” indicator has illuminated, press the EV drive mode switch before the gasoline engine starts to switch to EV drive mode.

■Automatic cancelation of EV drive mode

When driving in EV drive mode, the gasoline engine may automatically restart in the following situations. When EV drive mode is canceled, a buzzer will sound, the EV drive mode indicator will flash and then turn off, and a message will be displayed on the multi-information display.

●The hybrid battery (traction battery) becomes low.
● Vehicle speed is high.
●The accelerator pedal is depressed firmly or the vehicle is on a hill etc.

■ Possible driving distance when driving in EV drive mode

EV drive mode's possible driving distance ranges from a few hundred meters to approximately 2 km (1.3 miles). However, depending on vehicle conditions, there are situations when EV drive mode cannot be used.

(The distance that is possible depends on the hybrid battery [traction battery] level and driving conditions.)

■Changing a driving mode when in EV drive mode

EV drive mode can be used in conjunction with Eco drive mode and power mode.

However, EV drive mode may be automatically canceled when used in conjunction with power mode.

Fuel economy

The hybrid system is designed to achieve the best possible fuel economy during normal driving (using the gasoline engine and electric motor [traction motor]). Driving in EV drive mode more than necessary may lower fuel economy.

WARNING

■Caution while driving

When driving in EV drive mode, pay special attention to the area around the vehicle. Because there is no engine noise, pedestrians, people riding bicycles or other people and vehicles in the area may not be aware of the vehicle starting off or approaching them, so take extra care while driving.

Hybrid transmission

Shifting the shift lever

Operate the shift lever gently and ensure correct shifting operation. Release the shift lever after each shifting operation to allow it return to the position.

When shifting to the D or R positions, move the shift lever along the shift gate.

To shift to the N position, slide the shift lever to the right and hold it. The shift position will change to N.

To shift to the B position, pull the shift lever to the rear along the shift gate. Shifting to B is only possible when the shift position D is selected.

When shifting from P to N, D or R, from D to R, or from R to D, ensure that the brake pedal is being depressed and that the vehicle is stationary.

When selecting a shift position, make sure that the shift position has been changed to the desired position by checking the shift position indicator provided on the instrument panel.

When a shift position other than D or B is selected, the arrow toward B disappears from the shift position indicator.

Shift position purpose

Shift position Objective or function
P Parking the vehicle/starting the hybrid system
R Reversing
N Neutral
D Normal driving	*
B	Applying moderate engine braking when driving down hills or on steep slopes

*: To improve fuel efficiency and reduce noises, set the shift position in D for normal driving.

P position switch

■ When changing the shift position to P

The shift position can be changed to P through the use of the P position switch.

Fully stop the vehicle and set the parking brake, and then press the P position switch.

When the shift position is changed to P, the switch indicator comes on.

Check that the P position indicator is illuminated on the shift position indicator.

■ Changing the shift position from P to other positions

●While depressing the brake pedal firmly, operate the shift lever. If the shift lever is operated without depressing the brake pedal, a buzzer will sound and the shifting operation will be disabled.
- When selecting the shift position, make sure to use the shift position indicator for checking that the desired shift position has been attained. (→P. 78)
●The shift position cannot be changed from P to B directly.

Selecting a driving mode

The following modes can be selected to suit driving conditions.

① Eco drive mode

Use Eco drive mode to help achieve low fuel consumption during trips that involve frequent accelerating and braking. The operation of the air conditioning system will be minimized.

Press the "ECO MODE" switch once more to cancel the Eco drive mode.

Eco drive mode will not be canceled until the “ECO MODE” switch is pressed, even if the power switch is turned off.

Press the "PWR MODE" switch to change the driving mode to power mode.

② Power mode

Use when high levels of response and feeling are desirable, such as when driving in mountainous regions or when overtaking.

Press the "PWR MODE" switch once more to cancel the power mode.

Turning the power switch off will cancel power mode.

Press the “ECO MODE” switch to change the driving mode to Eco drive mode.

■ Using engine braking

To use engine braking, select the B position.

● During high speed driving, you may feel that deceleration by engine braking is less than that of a conventional vehicle.
- Do not continue normal driving with the transmission in B for a long time. This may cause decreased fuel economy. To prevent this, use D for normal driving.

■Reverse warning buzzer

When shifting into R, a buzzer will sound to inform the driver that the shift position is in R.

When the accelerator pedal is depressed while the shift position is in N

A buzzer will sound to inform the driver that the shift position is in N.

Operation of the air conditioning system in Eco drive mode

Eco drive mode controls the heating/cooling operations and fan speed of the air conditioning system to enhance fuel efficiency. ( P. 327) To improve air conditioning performance, adjust the temperature setting or fan speed, or turn off Eco drive mode.

For the shift positions

• When the power switch is off, the shift position cannot be changed.
• When the power switch is in ON mode (the hybrid system is not operating), the shift position can only be changed to N. The shift position will be changed to N even if the shift position is shifted to D or R and held in that position.
• When the "READY" indicator is on, the shift position can be changed from P to D, N or R.
• When the “READY” indicator is flashing, the shift position cannot be changed from P to other position even if the shift lever is operated.

Wait until the "READY" indicator changes from a flashing to a solid light, and then operate the shift lever again.

●The shift position can only be changed to B directly from D.

Alarms

If an attempt is made to change the shift position by moving the shift lever or by pressing the P position switch in any of the following situations, a buzzer will sound and the shifting operation will be disabled or the shift position will automatically change to N. When this happens, select an appropriate shift position.

●Situations where the shifting operation will be disabled:

• When an attempt is made to change the shift position from P to another position by moving the shift lever without depressing the brake pedal.
• When an attempt is made to change the shift position from P or N to B by moving the shift lever.

● Situations where the shift position will automatically change to N:

• When the P position switch is pressed while the vehicle is running. *1
• When an attempt is made to select the R position by moving the shift lever when the vehicle is moving forward. ^2
• When an attempt is made to select the D position by moving the shift lever when the vehicle is moving in reverse. ^3
• When an attempt is made to change the shift position from R to B by moving the shift lever.

*1: Shift position may be changed to P when driving at extremely low speeds.
*2: Shift position may be changed to R when driving at low speeds.
*3: Shift position may be changed to D when driving at low speeds.

■ When driving with cruise control activated

Even if switching the driving mode to power mode with the intent of enabling engine braking, engine braking will not activate because cruise control will not be canceled. ( P. 199)

Customization

Settings (e. g. Reverse warning buzzer) can be changed. (Customizable feature →P. 457)

WARNING

■When driving on slippery road surfaces

Be careful of downshifting and sudden acceleration, as this could result in the vehicle skidding to the side or spinning.

For the shift lever

Do not remove the shift lever knob or use anything but a genuine Toyota shift lever knob. Also, do not hang anything on the shift lever.

Doing so could prevent the shift lever from returning to position, causing unexpected accidents to occur when the vehicle is in motion.

P position switch

• Do not press the P position switch while the vehicle is moving.
  If the P position switch is pressed when driving at very low speeds (for example, directly before stopping the vehicle), the vehicle may stop suddenly when the shift position switches to P, which could lead to an accident.
  In order to prevent the shift position from accidentally being changed, do not touch the P position switch or shift lever when not using them.

NOTICE

■ Situations where the shift control system malfunctions are possible

If any of the following situations occurs, the shift control system malfunctions are possible.

Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place on level ground, apply the parking brake, and then contact your Toyota dealer.

• When a warning message indicating malfunction appears on the multi-information display. (→P. 411)
• When the shift position indicator remains off.

■Hybrid battery (traction battery) charge

If shift position N is selected, the hybrid battery (traction battery) will not be charged. To help prevent the battery from discharging, avoid leaving the N position selected for an extended period of time.

If the vehicle cannot be shifted out of P

There is a possibility that the 12-volt battery is discharged. Check the 12-volt battery in this situation.

Notes regarding shift lever and P position switch operation

Avoid repeatedly operating the shift lever and P position switch in quick succession.

The system protection function may activate and it will not be temporarily possible to shift the shift position other than P. If this happens, please wait for approximately 20 seconds before attempting to change the shift position again.

Turn signal lever

Operating instructions

① Left turn
② Lane change to the left (move the lever partway and release it)
The left hand signals will flash 3 times.
③ Lane change to the right (move the lever partway and release it)
The right hand signals will flash 3 times.
④ Right turn

■ Turn signals can be operated when

The power switch is in ON mode.

If the indicator flashes faster than usual

Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not burned out.

Customization

The number of times the turn signals flash during a lane change can be changed. (Customizable feature → P. 457)

Parking brake

Operating instructions

① To set the parking brake, fully pull the parking brake lever while depressing the brake pedal.
② To release the parking brake, slightly raise the lever and lower it completely while pressing the button.

Parking the vehicle

→P. 132

Parking brake engaged warning buzzer

If the vehicle is driven at a speed of approximately 5 km/h (3 mph) or more with the parking brake engaged, a buzzer will sound.

"Release Parking Brake" will be displayed on the multi-information display.

■ Usage in winter time

→P. 220

NOTICE

Before driving

Fully release the parking brake.

Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake wear.

Headlight switch

The headlights can be operated manually or automatically.

Operating instructions

Turning the end of the lever turns on the lights as follows:

▶ Type A

① The daytime running lights turn on. (→P. 161)
② The front position, tail, license plate and instrument panel lights turn on.
③ The headlights and all lights listed above turn on.

▶ Type B

① AUTO The headlights, daytime running lights (→P. 161) and all the lights listed below turn on and off automatically. (When the power switch is in ON mode)
② The front position, tail, license plate and instrument panel lights turn on.
③ D The headlights and all lights listed above turn on.
④ O Off

The daytime running lights turn on. (→P. 161)

Turning on the high beam headlights

① With the headlights on, push the lever away from you to turn on the high beams.

Pull the lever toward you to the center position to turn the high beams off.

② Pull the lever toward you and release it to flash the high beams once.

You can flash the high beams with the headlights on or off.

■Daytime running light system

To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers during daytime driving, the daytime running lights turn on automatically whenever the hybrid system is started and the parking brake is released with the headlight switch off or in the APOSition. (illuminate brighter than the front position lights.) Daytime running lights are not designed for use at night.

■Headlight control sensor (if equipped)

The sensor may not function properly if an object is placed on the sensor, or anything that blocks the sensor is affixed to the windshield.

Doing so interferes with the sensor detecting the level of ambient light and may cause the automatic headlight system to malfunction.

■Automatic light off system

All lights turn off automatically if the power switch is turned off and the driver's door is opened.

To turn the lights on again, turn the power switch to ON mode, or turn the light switch off once and then back to 300.

Light reminder buzzer

A buzzer sounds when the power switch is turned off or turned to ACCES-SORY mode and the driver's door is opened while the lights are turned on.

■Automatic headlight leveling system

The level of the headlights is automatically adjusted according to the number of passengers and the loading condition of the vehicle to ensure that the headlights do not interfere with other road users.

■12-volt battery-saving function

In the following conditions, the remaining lights will go off automatically after 20 minutes in order to prevent the vehicle battery from being discharged:

● The headlights and/or tail lights are on.
The power switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off.

This function will be canceled in any of the following situations:

When the power switch is turned to ON mode.

• When the light switch is operated.
• When a door is opened or closed.

Customization

Settings (e.g. light sensor sensitivity) can be changed.

Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the hybrid system is not operating.

Fog light switch\*

The fog lights secure excellent visibility in difficult driving conditions, such as in rain and fog.

① ○ Turns the front fog lights off
② 扣 Turns the front fog lights on

■Fog lights can be used when

The headlights or the front position lights are turned on.

Windshield wipers and washer

Operating the wiper lever

Operate the lever as follows to operate the wipers.

① Intermittent windshield wiper operation
② ▼ Low speed windshield wiper operation
③ ▼ High speed windshield wiper operation
④ △ Temporary operation

Wiper intervals can be adjusted when intermittent operation is selected.

⑤ Increases the intermittent wind-shield wiper frequency
⑥ Decreases the intermittent windshield wiper frequency

⑦ Washer/wiper dual operation
Wipers will automatically operate a couple of times after the washer squirts.
When the headlights are on and the lever is pulled and held, the headlight cleaners will operate once. After this, the headlight cleaners will operate every 5th time the lever is pulled.

The windshield wiper and washer can be operated when

The power switch is in ON mode.

If no windshield washer fluid sprays

Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked if there is washer fluid in the windshield washer fluid reservoir.

WARNING

■Caution regarding the use of washer fluid

When it is cold, do not use the washer fluid until the windshield becomes warm. The fluid may freeze on the windshield and cause low visibility. This may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

■When the windshield is dry

Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield.

■When there is no washer fluid spray from the nozzle

Damage to the washer fluid pump may be caused if the lever is pulled toward you and held continually.

When a nozzle becomes blocked

In this case, contact your Toyota dealer.

Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.

Rear window wiper and washer

Operating instructions

The wiper operation is selected by moving the lever as follows:

① --- Intermittent window wiper operation
② Normal window wiper operation

③ Washer/wiper dual operation The wiper will automatically operate a couple of times after the washer squirts.

The rear window wiper and washer can be operated when

The power switch is in ON mode.

If no windshield washer fluid sprays

Check that the washer nozzle is not blocked if there is washer fluid in the windshield washer fluid reservoir.

NOTICE

■When the rear window is dry

Do not use the wiper, as it may damage the rear window.

■When the washer fluid tank is empty

Do not operate the switch continually as the washer fluid pump may overheat.

When a nozzle becomes blocked

In this case, contact your Toyota dealer.

Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.

Opening the fuel tank cap

Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap:

Before refueling the vehicle

• Close all the doors and windows, and turn the power switch off.
• Confirm the type of fuel.

Fuel types

→P. 456

■Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline

To help prevent incorrect fueling, your vehicle has a fuel tank opening that only accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.

WARNING

■When refueling the vehicle

Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

●After exiting the vehicle and before opening the fuel door, touch an unpainted metal surface to discharge any static electricity. It is important to discharge static electricity before refueling because sparks resulting from static electricity can cause fuel vapors to ignite while refueling.
●Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it. A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened. Wait until the sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap. In hot weather, pressurized fuel may spray out the filler neck and cause injury.
- Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their body to come close to an open fuel tank.
- Do not inhale vaporized fuel. Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled.
- Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle. Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire.
- Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically charged. This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition hazard.

When refueling

Observe the following precautions to prevent fuel overflowing from the fuel tank:

• Securely insert the fuel nozzle into the fuel filler neck.
• Stop filling the tank after the fuel nozzle automatically clicks off.
  ●Do not top off the fuel tank.

NOTICE

Refueling

Do not spill fuel during refueling.

Doing so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the emission control system to operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the vehicle's painted surface.

Opening the fuel tank cap

1 Pull up the opener to open the fuel filler door.

2 Turn the fuel tank cap slowly to remove it and hang it on the back of the fuel filler door.

Technical line drawing of two mechanical components with highlighted curved arrows indicating motion or assembly (no text or symbols)

Closing the fuel tank cap

After refueling, turn the fuel tank cap until you hear a click. Once the cap is released, it will turn slightly in the opposite direction.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with no visible text or symbols

WARNING

■When replacing the fuel tank cap

Do not use anything but a genuine Toyota fuel tank cap designed for your vehicle. Doing so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in death or serious injury.

Toyota Safety Sense\*

The Toyota Safety Sense consists of the following drive assist systems and contributes to a safe and comfortable driving experience:

◆ PCS (Pre-Collision System)

→P.177

◆ LDA (Lane Departure Alert)

→P. 190

◆ Automatic High Beam

→P. 195

WARNING

Toyota Safety Sense

The Toyota Safety Sense is designed to operate under the assumption that the driver will drive safely, and is designed to help reduce the impact to the occupants and the vehicle in the case of a collision or assist the driver in normal driving conditions.

As there is a limit to the degree of recognition accuracy and control performance that this system can provide, do not overly rely on this system. The driver is always responsible for paying attention to the vehicle's surroundings and driving safely.

Vehicle data recording

The pre-collision system is equipped with a sophisticated computer that will record certain data, such as:

• Accelerator status
• Brake status
• Vehicle speed
  • Operation status of the pre-collision system functions
  • Information (such as the distance and relative speed between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead or other objects)

●Data usage

Toyota may use the data recorded in this computer to diagnose malfunctions, conduct research and development, and improve quality.

Toyota will not disclose the recorded data to a third party except:

• With the consent of the vehicle owner or with the consent of the lessee if the vehicle is leased
• In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a government agency
• For use by Toyota in a lawsuit
• For research purposes where the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner

Front sensor

The front sensor is located on the upper side of the windshield. It consists of 2 types of sensors, each of which detects information necessary to operate the drive assist systems.

① Laser sensors
② Monocular camera sensor

WARNING

Front sensor

The front sensor uses lasers to detect vehicles ahead of your vehicle. The front sensor is classified as class 1M laser product according to the IEC 60825-1 standard. Under normal usage conditions, these lasers are not harmful to the naked eye. However, it is necessary to observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in the loss of eyesight or severe visual impairment.

●To avoid hazardous laser radiation exposure, never attempt to disassemble the front sensor (e.g. remove the lenses). When disassembled, the front sensor is classified as a class 3B laser product according to the IEC 60825-1 standard. Class 3B lasers are hazardous and pose a risk of eye injury under direct exposure.
- Do not attempt to look into the front sensor with a magnifying glass, microscope or other optical instrument within a distance of less than 100 mm (3.9 in.).

WARNING

Laser classification label

Laser explanatory label

Laser emission data

Maximum average power: 45 mW

Pulse duration: 33 ns

Wave length: 905 nm

Divergence (horizontal x vertical): 28^ × 12^

WARNING

■To avoid malfunction of the front sensor

Observe the following precautions.

Otherwise, the front sensor may not operate properly, possibly leading to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

• Keep the windshield clean at all times. If the windshield is dirty or covered with an oily film, water droplets, snow, etc., clear the windshield. If the inner side of the windshield in front of the front sensor is dirty, contact your Toyota dealer.
• Do not attach objects, such as stickers, transparent stickers, etc., and so forth, to the outer side of the windshield in front of the front sensor (shaded area in the illustration).

A: From the top of the windshield to approximately 10 cm (4.0 in.) below the bottom of the front sensor

B: Approximately 20 cm (7.9 in.) (Approximately 10 cm (4.0 in.) to the right and left from the center of the front sensor)

- Do not install or attach anything to the inner side of the windshield under the front sensor (shaded area in the illustration).

A: Approximately 10 cm (4.0 in.) (Starting from the bottom of the front sensor) B: Approximately 20 cm (7.9 in.) (Approximately 10 cm (4.0 in.) to the right and left from the center of the front sensor)

- If there is a large difference in temperature between the inside and outside of the vehicle, such as in winter, the windshield is likely to fog up easily. If the part of the windshield in front of the front sensor is fogged up or covered with condensation or ice, the PCS warning light may flash and the system may be temporarily disabled. In this case, use the windshield defogger to remove the fog, etc. (→P. 325)

WARNING

• If the area of the windshield in front of the front sensor is covered with water droplets, use the windshield wipers to remove them.
  If the water droplets are not sufficiently removed, the performance of the front sensor may be reduced.
• If water droplets cannot be properly removed from the area of the windshield in front of the front sensor by the windshield wipers, replace the wiper insert or wiper blade.
  If the wiper inserts or wiper blades need to be replaced, contact your Toyota dealer.
• Do not attach window tinting to the windshield.
• Replace the windshield if it is damaged or cracked.
  If the windshield needs to be replaced, contact your Toyota dealer.
• Do not install an antenna in front of the sensor.
• Do not get the front sensor wet.
• Do not allow bright lights to shine into the front sensor.
• Do not dirty or damage the front sensor.
  When cleaning the inside of the windshield, do not allow glass cleaner to contact the lens. Also, do not touch the lens.
  If the lens is dirty or damaged, contact your Toyota dealer.
• Do not subject the front sensor to a strong impact.
• Do not change the installation position or direction of the front sensor or remove it.
  ●Do not disassemble the front sensor.
• Do not install an electronic device or device that emits strong electric waves near the front sensor.
• Do not modify any components of the vehicle around the front sensor (inside rear view mirror, sun visors, etc.) or ceiling.
• Do not attach any accessories that may obstruct the front sensor to the hood, front grille or front bumper. Contact your Toyota dealer for details.
• If a surfboard or other long object is to be mounted on the roof, make sure that it will not obstruct the front sensor.
  Do not modify the headlights or other lights.
  Do not attach anything to or place anything on the dashboard.

PCS (Pre-Collision System)\*

The pre-collision system uses the front sensor to detect vehicles in front of your vehicle. When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision with a vehicle is high, a warning operates to urge the driver to take evasive action and the potential brake pressure is increased to help the driver avoid the collision. If the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision with a vehicle is extremely high, the brakes are automatically applied to help avoid the collision or help reduce the impact of the collision.

The pre-collision system can be disabled/enabled and the warning timing can be changed. ( P. 180)

◆ Pre-collision warning

When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is high, a buzzer will sound and a warning message will be displayed on the multi-information display to urge the driver to take evasive action.

◆ Pre-collision brake assist

When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision with a vehicle is high, the system applies greater braking force in relation to how strongly the brake pedal is depressed.

◆ Pre-collision braking

When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision with a vehicle is high, the system warns the driver. If the system determines that the possibility of a collision is extremely high, the brakes are automatically applied to help avoid the collision or reduce the collision speed.

WARNING

■Limitations of the pre-collision system

●The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking care to observe your surroundings.

Do not use the pre-collision system instead of normal braking operations under any circumstances. This system will not prevent collisions or lessen collision damage or injury in every situation. Do not overly rely on this system. Failure to do so may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

Although this system is designed to help avoid and reduce the impact of a collision, its effectiveness may change according to various conditions, therefore the system may not always be able to achieve the same level of performance.

Read the following conditions carefully. Do not overly rely on this system and always drive carefully.

- Conditions under which the system may operate even if there is no possibility of a collision: P. 182

- Conditions under which the system may not operate properly: P. 186

- Do not attempt to test the operation of the pre-collision system yourself, as the system may not operate properly, possibly leading to an accident.

■Pre-collision braking

●The pre-collision braking function may not operate if certain operations are performed by the driver. If the accelerator pedal is being depressed strongly or the steering wheel is being turned, the system may determine that the driver is taking evasive action and possibly prevent the pre-collision braking function from operating.

In some situations, while the pre-collision braking function is operating, operation of the function may be canceled if the accelerator pedal is depressed strongly or the steering wheel is turned and the system determines that the driver is taking evasive action.

●A large amount of braking force is applied while the pre-collision braking function is operating. Additionally, as the operation of the pre-collision braking function will be canceled after the vehicle has been stopped for approximately 2 seconds if it is stopped by the operation of the pre-collision braking function, the driver should depress the brake pedal as necessary.

- If the brake pedal is being depressed, the system may determine that the driver is taking evasive action and possibly delay the operation timing of the pre-collision braking function.

WARNING

●While driving, such as when driving through a railway crossing, the system may determine that the possibility of a collision with an object, such as railway crossing barrier, is high and operate the pre-collision braking function. To move the vehicle in an emergency, such as if the system operates in a railway crossing, perform the following operations and then take the necessary measures to ensure your safety.
- If the vehicle has been stopped, depress the accelerator pedal.
- If the vehicle is decelerating, fully depress the accelerator pedal. (→P. 181)
- Disable the pre-collision system. ( P. 180)

■When to disable the pre-collision system

In the following situations, disable the system, as it may not operate properly, possibly leading to an accident resulting in death or serious injury:

●When the vehicle is being towed
●When your vehicle is towing another vehicle
- When transporting the vehicle via truck, boat, train or similar means of transportation
- When the vehicle is raised on a lift with the hybrid system on and the tires are allowed to rotate freely
- When inspecting the vehicle using a drum tester such as a chassis dynamometer or speedometer tester, or when using an on vehicle wheel balancer
- If the vehicle cannot be driven in a stable manner, such as when the vehicle has been in an accident or is malfunctioning
●When the vehicle is driven in a sporty manner or off-road
- When the condition of the tires is poor and they do not perform well (→P. 372, 376)
- When tires of a size other than specified are installed
- When tire chains are installed
- When a compact spare tire or an emergency tire puncture repair kit is used

Changing settings of the pre-collision system

■ Enabling/disabling the pre-collision system

Press the PCS switch for 3 seconds or more.

The PCS warning light will turn on and a message will be displayed in the multi-information display, when the system is turned off.

To enable the system, press the PCS switch again.

The pre-collision system is enabled each time the hybrid system is started.

■ Changing the pre-collision warning timing

Press the PCS switch to display the current warning timing in the multi-information display. Each time the PCS switch is pressed in the displayed state, the timing for the warning changes as follows:

If the operation timing setting has been changed, the setting will be retained the next time the hybrid system is started.

① Far

The warning will begin to operate earlier than with the default timing.

② Middle

This is the default setting.

③ Near

The warning will begin to operate later than with the default timing.

graph TD
    A["① Vehicle Opening"] --> B["② Car Window"]
    B --> C["③ Parking Seat"]
    C --> D["③ Parking Seat"]
    D --> E["③ Parking Seat"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#ffc,stroke:#333
    note right of E: CTH4SAP244

Operational conditions

The pre-collision system is enabled and determines that the possibility of a frontal collision with a vehicle is high.

Each function is operational at the following speeds:

●Pre-collision warning:

• Vehicle speed is approximately 15 to 140km / h (10 to 86 mph).
• The relative speed between your vehicle and a preceding vehicle is approximately 15 km/h (10 mph) or more.

●Pre-collision brake assist:

• Vehicle speed is approximately 30 to 80km / h (19 to 49 mph).
• The relative speed between your vehicle and a preceding vehicle is approximately 30 km/h (19 mph) or more.

●Pre-collision braking:

• Vehicle speed is approximately 10 to 80 ~km / h (7 to 49 mph).
• The relative speed between your vehicle and a preceding vehicle is approximately 10 km/h (7 mph) or more.

The system may not operate in the following situations:

• If a battery terminal has been disconnected and reconnected and then the vehicle has not been driven for a certain amount of time
  ●If the R shift position is selected
• If VSC is disabled (only the pre-collision warning function will be operational)

■Cancelation of the pre-collision braking

- If either of the following occur while the pre-collision braking function is operating, it will be canceled:

• The accelerator pedal is depressed strongly.
• The steering wheel is turned sharply or abruptly.

- If the vehicle is stopped by the operation of the pre-collision braking function, the operation of the pre-collision braking function will be canceled after the vehicle has been stopped for approximately 2 seconds.

Conditions under which the system may operate even if there is no possibility of a collision

- In some situations such as the following, the system may determine that there is a possibility of a frontal collision and operate.

- When passing a vehicle in an oncoming lane that is stopped to make a right/left turn

Top-down diagram of two cars on a road with visible traffic light and distance markers (no text or symbols)

- When passing an oncoming vehicle while making a left or right turn

Top-down diagram of a road intersection with two cars and a traffic cone, no text or symbols present

- When driving on a road where relative location to vehicle ahead in an adjacent lane may change, such as on a winding road

Diagram showing two cars approaching a road with a dashed lane, no text or symbols present

- When rapidly closing on a preceding vehicle

Top-down diagram of two cars on a road with visible collision and traffic lines (no text or symbols)

- If the front of the vehicle is raised or lowered, such as when the road surface is uneven or undulating

- When passing extremely close to a vehicle or structural object

Top-down diagram of two cars on a road with motion lines indicating speed, no text or symbols present

- When there is a vehicle or object by the roadside at the entrance of a curve

- When driving on a narrow path surrounded by a structure, such as in a tunnel or on an iron bridge

- When there is a reflective object (manhole cover, steel plate, etc.), steps, dip, or a protrusion on the road surface or roadside

- When passing through a place with a low structure above the road (low ceiling, traffic sign, etc.)

Diagram of a car driving on a road with sensor waves, labeled CTH45BM114 (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

- When there is a structural object (overpass, traffic sign, billboard, street light, etc.) at the top of an uphill road

Illustration of a car on a slope with signal waves and a signpost, no text or symbols present

- When rapidly closing on an electric toll gate barrier, parking area barrier, or other barrier that opens and closes

Diagram of a car driving on an electric vehicle sensor array, no text or symbols present

- When using an automatic car wash

- When approaching a low hanging object that may contact the vehicle, such as a banner, tree branches or thick grass

- When the vehicle is hit by water, snow, dust, etc. from a vehicle ahead

Diagram showing a car driving on a road with sensor waves and a building facade (no text or symbols)

- When driving through steam or smoke

Two cars emitting sound waves on a road, no text or symbols visible

Illustration of a car emitting sound waves toward a smokestack (no text or symbols)

- When there are patterns or paint on the road or a wall that may be mistaken for a vehicle

- When the front part of the vehicle is raised or lowered

Two cars with sound waves on a road, no text or symbols present

• When the sensor is misaligned due to a strong impact being applied to the sensor, etc.
• When the vehicle is being parked in a place where there is a low hanging object at the height of the front sensor
• When the windshield is covered with raindrops, etc.

Diagram showing a car approaching a road with traffic flow and a traffic signpost (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

Diagram of a car parked in front of a modern building with visible sound waves (no text or symbols)

Side view of a car with visible window patterns and no text or symbols on the car surface

■Situations in which the system may not operate properly

In some situations such as the following, a vehicle may not be detected by the front sensor, preventing the system from operating properly:

- If an oncoming vehicle is approaching your vehicle

- When approaching the side or front of a vehicle

- If a preceding vehicle has a small rear end, such as an unloaded truck

- If a preceding vehicle has a low rear end, such as a low bed trailer

Diagram showing a car approaching a truck with sensor waves (no text or symbols)

- If a vehicle ahead is carrying a load which protrudes past its rear bumper

- If a vehicle ahead has extremely high ground clearance

- If a vehicle ahead is irregularly shaped, such as a tractor or side car

- If the sun or other light is shining directly on a vehicle ahead

- If a vehicle cuts in front of your vehicle or emerges from beside a vehicle

Top-down diagram of two cars on a road with sound waves, no text or symbols present

- If a vehicle ahead makes an abrupt maneuver (such as sudden swerving, acceleration or deceleration)

- When suddenly cutting behind a preceding vehicle

- When a vehicle ahead is not directly in front of your vehicle

Top-down diagram of three cars with a curved road and traffic flow, no text or symbols present

- When driving in inclement weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow or a sand storm

Illustration of a car driving on a wet road with rain and clouds, no text or symbols present

• When the vehicle is hit by water, snow, dust, etc. from a vehicle ahead
• When driving through steam or smoke that may obscure vehicles ahead
• When driving in a place where the surrounding brightness changes suddenly, such as at the entrance or exit of a tunnel

- When a very bright light, such as the sun or the headlights of oncoming traffic, shines directly into the front sensor

Illustration of a car emitting a light beam toward a sun, labeled CTH45BM092 (no text on diagram)

- When the surrounding area is dim, such as at dawn or dusk, or while at night or in a tunnel

Illustration of a car driving on a road with a tunnel illuminated by light beams (no text or symbols)

- While driving on a curve and for a certain amount of time after driving on a curve

• If your vehicle is skidding

Top-down schematic of a car with motion lines, no text or symbols present

- When the front part of the vehicle is raised or lowered

• If the wheels are misaligned

- If a wiper blade is blocking the front sensor

• The vehicle is wobbling.

- The vehicle is being driven at extremely high speeds.

- When driving on roads with sharp bends or uneven surfaces

- When a preceding vehicle is a poor reflector of laser

- When the sensor is misaligned due to a strong impact being applied to the sensor, etc.

Diagram showing a car approaching a road with traffic flow and a traffic signpost (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

In some situations such as the following, sufficient braking force may not be obtained, preventing the system from performing properly:

- If the braking functions cannot operate to their full extent, such as when the brake parts are extremely cold, extremely hot, or wet

- If the vehicle is not properly maintained (brakes or tires are excessively worn, improper tire inflation pressure, etc.)

- When the vehicle is being driven on a gravel road or other slippery surface

If the PCS warning light flashes and a warning message is displayed on the multi-information display

The pre-collision system may be temporarily unavailable or there may be a malfunction in the system.

• In the following situations, the warning light will turn off, the message will disappear and the system will become operational when normal operating conditions return:
• When the area around the front sensor is hot, such as in the sun
• When the windshield is fogged up or covered with condensation or ice (→P. 325)
• When the front sensor or the area around either sensor is cold, such as in an extremely cold environment
• If the area in front of the front sensor is obstructed, such as when the hood is open
• If the PCS warning light continues to flash or the warning message does not disappear, the system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

If VSC is disabled

• If TRC and VSC are disabled (→P. 213), the pre-collision brake assist and pre-collision braking functions are also disabled. However, the pre-collision warning function will still operate.
• The PCS warning light illuminates and “VSC Turned Off Pre-Collision Brake System Unavailable” is displayed on the multi-information display.

LDA (Lane Departure Alert)\*

Summary of function

When driving on roads with white (yellow) lines, this function alerts the driver when the vehicle might depart from its lane.

The LDA system recognizes visible white (yellow) lines with the front sensor on the upper portion of the windshield.

Lane departure alert function

When the system determines that the vehicle might depart from its lane, a warning is displayed on the multi-information display and the warning buzzer sounds to alert the driver.

When the warning buzzer sounds, check the surrounding road situation and carefully operate the steering wheel to move the vehicle back to the center within the white (yellow) lines.

WARNING

■Before using the LDA system

Do not rely solely upon the LDA system. LDA is not a system which automatically drives the vehicle or reduces the amount of attention that must be paid to the area in front of the vehicle. The driver must always assume full responsibility for driving safely by always paying careful attention to the surrounding conditions and operate the steering wheel to correct the path of the vehicle. Also, make sure to take adequate breaks when fatigued, such as from driving for a long period of time.

Failure to perform appropriate driving operations and pay careful attention may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

■To avoid operating the LDA by mistake

When not using the LDA system, use the LDA switch to turn the system off.

■ Preventing LDA system malfunctions and operations performed by mistake

• Do not modify the headlights or place stickers, etc., on the surface of the lights.
• Do not modify the suspension etc. If the suspension etc. needs to be replaced, contact your Toyota dealer.
• Do not install or place anything on the hood or grille. Also, do not install a grille guard (bull bars, kangaroo bar, etc.).
• If your windshield needs repairs, contact your Toyota dealer.

Turning the LDA system on

Press the LDA switch to turn the LDA system on.

The LDA indicator illuminates and a message is displayed on the multi-information display.

Press the LDA switch again to turn the LDA system off.

When the LDA system is turned on or off, operation of the LDA system continues in the same condition the next time the hybrid system is started.

Indication on the multi-information display

▶ Inside of displayed white lines is white

▶ Inside of displayed white lines is black

Abstract geometric pattern with two white triangular shapes on a black background (no text or symbols)

Indicates that the system is recognizing white (yellow) lines. When the vehicle departs from its lane, the white line displayed on the side the vehicle departs from flashes orange.

Two white triangular shapes on a black background, resembling stylized letters or symbols (no text or labels)

Indicates that the system is not able to recognize white (yellow) lines or is temporarily canceled.

Operation conditions

This function operates when all of the following conditions are met.

●LDA is turned on.
●Vehicle speed is approximately 50 km/h (32 mph) or more.
●System recognizes white (yellow) lines.
●Width of traffic lane is approximately 3 m (9.8 ft.) or more.

●Turn signal lever is not operated.

● Vehicle is driven on a straight road or around a gentle curve with a radius of more than approximately 150 m (492 ft.).

● No system malfunctions are detected. (→P. 406)

■Temporary cancellation of functions

When operation conditions are no longer met, a function may be temporarily canceled. However, when the operation conditions are met again, operation of the function is automatically restored. ( P. 193)

■Lane departure alert function

The warning buzzer may be difficult to hear due to external noise, audio play-back, etc.

■ White (yellow) lines are only on one side of road

The LDA system will not operate for the side on which white (yellow) lines could not be recognized.

■ After the vehicle has been parked in the sun

The LDA system may not be available and a warning message may be displayed for a while after starting off. When the temperature in the cabin decreases and the temperature around the front sensor ( P. 173) becomes suitable for its operation, the system will begin to operate.

■ Conditions in which functions may not operate properly

In the following situations, the front sensor may not detect white (yellow) lines and various functions may not operate normally.

●There are shadows on the road that run parallel with, or cover, the white (yellow) lines.

●The vehicle is driven in an area without white (yellow) lines, such as in front of a tollgate or checkpoint, or at an intersection, etc.

●The white (yellow) lines are cracked, or cat's eyes (reflective markers) or stones are present.

●The white (yellow) lines cannot be seen or are difficult to see due to sand, etc.

●The vehicle is driven on a road surface that is wet due to rain, puddles, etc.

●The traffic lines are yellow (which may be more difficult to recognize than lines that are white).

●The white (yellow) lines cross over a curb, etc.

●The vehicle is driven on a bright surface, such as concrete.

●The vehicle is driven on a surface that is bright due to reflected light, etc.

●The vehicle is driven in an area where the brightness changes suddenly, such as at the entrances and exits of tunnels, etc.

● Light from the headlights of an oncoming vehicle, the sun, etc., enters the camera.

●The vehicle is driven where the road diverges, merges, etc.

●The vehicle is driven on a slope.

●The vehicle is driven on a road which tilts left or right, or a winding road.

●The vehicle is driven on an unpaved or rough road.

●The vehicle is driven around a sharp curve.

●The traffic lane is excessively narrow or wide.

●The vehicle is extremely tilted due to carrying heavy luggage or having improper tire pressure.

●The distance to the preceding vehicle is extremely short.

- The vehicle is moving up and down a large amount due to road conditions during driving (poor roads or road seams).

The headlight lenses are dirty and emit a faint amount of light at night, or the beam axis has deviated.

●The vehicle has just changed lanes or crossed an intersection.

■Warning messages for the LDA system

Warning messages are used to indicate a system malfunction or to inform the driver of the need for caution while driving.

Customization

→P. 87

Automatic High Beam\*

The Automatic High Beam uses an in-vehicle front sensor to assess the brightness of streetlights, the lights of vehicles ahead etc., and automatically turns the high beam on or off as necessary.

WARNING

■Limitations of the Automatic High Beam

Do not rely on the Automatic High Beam. Always drive safely, taking care to observe your surroundings and turning the high beam on or off manually if necessary.

■ To prevent incorrect operation of the Automatic High Beam system

Do not overload the vehicle.

Activating the Automatic High Beam system

Push the lever away from you with the headlight switch in AUTO position.

The Automatic High Beam indicator will come on when the headlights are turned on automatically to indicate that the system is active.

Turning the high beam on/off manually

■ Switching to low beam

Pull the lever to original position.

The Automatic High Beam indicator will turn off.

Push the lever away from you to activate the Automatic High Beam system again.

Diagram showing a car steering wheel and a hand holding a device, with an inset highlighting the mechanical component (no text or symbols present)

■ Switching to high beam

Turn the light switch to position.

The Automatic High Beam indicator will turn off and the high beam indicator will turn on.

■High beam automatic turning on or off conditions

• When all of the following conditions are fulfilled, the high beam will be automatically turned on (after approximately 1 second):
• Vehicle speed is approximately 30 km/h (19 mph) or more.
• The area ahead of the vehicle is dark.
• There are no vehicles ahead with headlights or tail lights turned on.
• There are few streetlights on the road ahead.
• If any of the following conditions is met, the high beams will turn off automatically:
• Vehicle speed is below approximately 25 km/h (16 mph).
• The area ahead of the vehicle is not dark.
  • Vehicles ahead have their headlights or tail lights turned on.
• There are many streetlights on the road ahead.

■Front sensor detection information

●The high beam may not be automatically turned off in the following situations:
- When vehicles ahead suddenly appear from a curve
- When the vehicle is cut in front of by another vehicle
- When vehicles ahead are hidden from sight due to repeated curves, road dividers or roadside trees
- When vehicles ahead appear from the faraway lane on wide road
- When vehicles ahead have no lights

●The high beam may be turned off if a vehicle ahead that is using fog lights without using the headlights is detected.

House lights, street lights, traffic signals, and illuminated billboards or signs may cause the high beam to switch to the low beams, or the low beams to remain on.

●The following factors may affect the amount of time taken to turn the high beam on or off:

• The brightness of headlights, fog lights, and tail lights of vehicles ahead
• The movement and direction of vehicles ahead
• When a vehicle ahead only has operational lights on one side
• When a vehicle ahead is a two-wheeled vehicle
• The condition of the road (gradient, curve, condition of the road surface, etc.)
  • The number of passengers and amount of luggage

The high beam may be turned on or off when the driver does not expect it.

●Bicycles or similar objects may not be detected.

In the situations shown below, the system may not be able to accurately detect surrounding brightness levels. This may cause the low beams to remain on or the high beams to cause problems for pedestrians, vehicles ahead or other parties. In these cases, manually switch between the high and low beams.

• In bad weather (rain, snow, fog, sandstorms, etc.)
• The windshield is obscured by fog, mist, ice, dirt, etc.
• The windshield is cracked or damaged.
• The front sensor is deformed or dirty.

- The front sensor temperature is extremely high.

- Surrounding brightness levels are equal to those of headlights, tail lights or fog lights.

- Vehicles ahead have headlights or tail lights that are either switched off, dirty, are changing color, or are not aimed properly.

- When driving through an area of intermittently changing brightness and darkness.

- When frequently and repeatedly driving ascending/descending roads, or roads with rough, bumpy or uneven surfaces (such as stone-paved roads, gravel tracks, etc.).

- When frequently and repeatedly taking curves or driving on a winding road.

- There is a highly reflective object ahead of the vehicle, such as a sign or a mirror.

- The back of a vehicle ahead is highly reflective, such as a container on a truck.

- The vehicle's headlights are damaged or dirty, or are not aimed properly.

- The vehicle is listing or titling due to a flat tire, a trailer being towed, etc.

- The high beam and low beam are repeatedly being switched between in an abnormal manner.

- The driver believes that the high beam may be causing problems or distress to other drivers or pedestrians nearby.

Cruise control

Summary of functions

Use the cruise control to maintain a set speed without operating the accelerator pedal.

① Indicators
② Cruise control switch

Setting the vehicle speed

1 Press the "ON-OFF" button to activate the cruise control.

Cruise control indicator will come on.

Press the button again to deactivate the cruise control.

2 Accelerate or decelerate, with accelerator pedal operation, to the desired vehicle speed (above approximately 40 km/h [25 mph]) and push the lever down to set the speed.

Cruise control "SET" indicator will come on.

The vehicle speed at the moment the lever is released becomes the set speed.

Adjusting the set speed

To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set speed is obtained.

① Increases the speed
② Decreases the speed

Fine adjustment: Momentarily move the lever in the desired direction.

Large adjustment: Hold the lever in the desired direction.

The set speed will be increased or decreased as follows:

Fine adjustment: By approximately 1.6 km/h (1 mph) each time the lever is operated.

Large adjustment: The set speed can be increased or decreased continually until the lever is released.

Canceling and resuming the constant speed control

① Pulling the lever toward you cancels the constant speed control.

The speed setting is also canceled when the brake pedal is depressed.

② Pushing the lever up resumes the constant speed control.

However, resuming is available when the vehicle speed is more than approximately 40 km/h (25 mph).

Cruise control can be set when

●The shift position is in the D.
● Vehicle speed is above approximately 40 km/h (25 mph).

■Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed

●The vehicle can be accelerated by operating accelerator pedal. After accelerating, the set speed resumes.
- Even without canceling the cruise control, the set speed can be increased by first accelerating the vehicle to the desired speed and then pushing the lever down to set the new speed.

■Automatic cruise control cancelation

Cruise control is automatically canceled in any of the following situations.

● Actual vehicle speed falls more than approximately 16 km/h (10 mph) below the set speed.

At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.

● Actual vehicle speed is below approximately 40 km/h (25 mph).
●VSC is activated.

If “Cruise Control Malfunction Visit Your Dealer” is displayed on the multi-information display

Press the "ON-OFF" button once to deactivate the system, and then press the button again to reactivate the system.

If the cruise control speed cannot be set or if the cruise control cancels immediately after being activated, there may be a malfunction in the cruise control system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

WARNING

■To avoid operating the cruise control by mistake

Switch the cruise control off using the "ON-OFF" button when not in use.

■Situations unsuitable for cruise control

Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations.

Doing so may result in loss of control and could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

In heavy traffic
● On roads with sharp bends
● On winding roads
●On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
●On steep hills
Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.
- When your vehicle is during emergency towing

Rear view monitor system

▶ Vehicles with a multimedia system with "CAR" button

The rear view monitor system assists the driver by displaying guide lines and an image of the view behind the vehicle while backing up, for example while parking.

The screen illustrations used in this text are intended as examples, and may differ from the image that is actually displayed on the screen.

▶ Vehicles with a navigation/multimedia system with “APPS” button Owners of models equipped with a navigation/multimedia system should refer to the “Navigation and Multimedia System Owner's Manual”.

The rear view image is displayed when the shift position is in R and the power switch is in ON mode.

The rear view monitor system will be deactivated when the shift position is shifted to any position other than R.

When the shift position is shifted to the R position and any mode button (such as "MENU") is pressed, the rear view monitor system is canceled, and the screen is switched to the mode of the button that was pressed.

Using the rear view monitor system

Screen description

The rear view monitor system screen will be displayed if the shift position is shifted to R while the power switch is in ON mode.

CTH46AP028

① Vehicle width guide lines

These lines indicate a guide path when the vehicle is being backed straight up.

The displayed width is wider than the actual vehicle width.

② Vehicle center guide line

This line indicates the estimated vehicle center on the ground.

③ Distance guide line

This line indicates a point approximately 0.5 m (1.5 ft.) (red) from the edge of the bumper.

④ Distance guide line

This line indicates a point approximately 1 m (3 ft.) (blue) from the edge of the bumper.

Rear view monitor system precautions

■ Area displayed on screen

The rear view monitor system displays an image of the view from the bumper of the rear area of the vehicle.

To adjust the image on the rear view monitor system screen. ( P. 239)

• The area displayed on the screen may vary according to vehicle orientation conditions.
• Objects which are close to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper cannot be seen on the screen.
  • The camera uses a special lens. The distance of the image that appears on the screen differs from the actual distance.
• Items which are located higher than the camera may not be displayed on the screen.

■ Rear view monitor system camera

The camera for the rear view monitor system is located above the license plate.

Line drawing of a car rearview with a magnified inset showing the engine compartment (no text or symbols)

●Using the camera

If dirt or foreign matter (such as water droplets, snow, mud etc.) is adhering to the camera, it cannot transmit a clear image. In this case, flush it with a large quantity of water and wipe the camera lens clean with a soft and wet cloth.

■ Differences between the screen and the actual road

The distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines may not actually be parallel with the dividing lines of the parking space, even when they appear to be so. Be sure to check visually.

The distances between the vehicle width guide lines and the left and right dividing lines of the parking space may not be equal, even when they appear to be so. Be sure to check visually.

The distance guide lines give a distance guide for flat road surfaces. In any of the following situations, there is a margin of error between the fixed guide lines on the screen and the actual distance/course on the road.

●When the ground behind the vehicle slopes up sharply

The distance guide lines will appear to be closer to the vehicle than the actual distance. Because of this, objects will appear to be farther away than they actually are. In the same way, there will be a margin of error between the guide lines and the actual distance/course on the road.

●When the ground behind the vehicle slopes down sharply

The distance guide lines will appear to be further from the vehicle than the actual distance. Because of this, objects will appear to be closer than they actually are. In the same way, there will be a margin of error between the guide lines and the actual distance/course on the road.

●When any part of the vehicle sags

When any part of the vehicle sags due to the number of passengers or the distribution of the load, there is a margin of error between the fixed guide lines on the screen and the actual distance/course on the road.

■ When approaching three-dimensional objects

The distance guide lines are displayed according to flat surfaced objects (such as the road). It is not possible to determine the position of three-dimensional objects (such as vehicles) using the distance guide lines. When approaching a three-dimensional object that extends outward (such as the flatbed of a truck), be careful of the following.

●Distance guide lines

Visually check the surroundings and the area behind the vehicle. On the screen, it appears that a truck is parked at point ② However, in reality if you back up to point ① you will hit the truck. On the screen, it appears that ① is closest and ③ is furthest away. However, in reality, the distance to ① and ⑤ the same, and ② is farther than ① and ③

●Vehicle width guide lines

Visually check the surroundings and the area behind the vehicle. In the case shown below, the truck appears to be outside of the vehicle width guide lines and the vehicle does not look as if it hits the truck. However, the rear body of the truck may actually cross over the vehicle width guide lines. In reality if you back up as guided by the vehicle width guide lines, the vehicle may hit the truck.

Things you should know

■ If you notice any symptoms

If you notice any of the following symptoms, refer to the likely cause and the solution, and re-check.

If the symptom is not resolved by the solution, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

Likely cause Solution
☐ The image is difficult to see
·The vehicle is in a dark area·The temperature around the lens is either high or low·The outside temperature is low·There are water droplets on the camera·It is raining or humid·Foreign matter (mud etc.) is adhering to the camera·Sunlight or headlights are shining directly into the camera·The vehicle is under fluorescent lights, sodium lights, mercury lights etc.	If this happens due to these causes, it does not indicate a malfunction. Back up while visually checking the vehicle's surroundings. (Use the monitor again once conditions have been improved.) To adjust the image on the rear view monitor system screen. (→P. 239)
☐ The image is blurry
Dirt or foreign matter (such as water droplets, snow, mud etc.) is adhering to the camera.	Flush the camera with a large quantity of water and wipe the camera lens clean with a soft and wet cloth.
☐ The image is out of alignment
The camera or surrounding area has received a strong impact.	Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
☐ The fixed guide lines are very far out of alignment
·The vehicle is tilted (there is a heavy load on the vehicle, tire pressure is low due to a tire puncture, etc.)·The vehicle is used on an incline.	If this happens due to these causes, it does not indicate a malfunction. Back up while visually checking the vehicle's surroundings.
The camera position is out of alignment.	Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

WARNING

■When using the rear view monitor system

The rear view monitor system is a supplemental device intended to assist the driver when backing up. When backing up, be sure to check visually behind and all around the vehicle both directly and using the mirrors before proceeding. If you do not, you may hit another vehicle, and could possibly cause an accident.

Pay attention to the following precautions when using the rear view monitor system.

●Never depend on the rear view monitor system entirely when backing up. The image and the position of the guide lines displayed on the screen may differ from the actual state.
Use caution, just as you would when backing up any vehicle.

- Be sure to back up slowly, depressing the brake pedal to control vehicle speed.

●The instructions given are only guidelines.

When and how much to turn the steering wheel will vary according to traffic conditions, road surface conditions, vehicle condition, etc. when parking. It is necessary to be fully aware of this before using the rear view monitor system.

- When parking, be sure to check that the parking space will accommodate your vehicle before maneuvering into it.

- Do not use the rear view monitor system in the following cases:

• On icy or slick road surfaces, or in snow
• When using tire chains or the compact spare tire
• When the back door is not closed completely
• On roads that are not flat or straight, such as curves or slopes.

In low temperatures, the screen may darken or the image may become faint. The image could distort when the vehicle is moving, or you may become unable to see the image on the screen. Be sure to check direct visually and with the mirrors all around the vehicle both directly and using the mirrors before proceeding.

- If the tire sizes are changed, the position of the fixed guide lines displayed on the screen may change.

●The camera uses a special lens. The distances between objects and pedestrians that appear in the image displayed on the screen will differ from the actual distances.

(→P. 204)

NOTICE

How to use the camera

●The rear view monitor system may not operate properly in the following cases.

- If the back of the vehicle is hit, the position and mounting angle of the camera may change.

- As the camera has a water proof construction, do not detach, disassemble or modify it. This may cause incorrect operation.

- When cleaning the camera lens, flush the camera with a large quantity of water and wipe it with a soft and wet cloth. Strongly rubbing the camera lens may cause the camera lens to be scratched and unable to transmit a clear image.

- Do not allow organic solvent, car wax, window cleaner or glass coat to adhere to the camera. If this happens, wipe it off as soon as possible.

- If the temperature changes rapidly, such as when hot water is poured on the vehicle in cold weather, the system may not operate normally.

- When washing the vehicle, do not apply intensive bursts of water to the camera or camera area. Doing so may result in the camera malfunctioning.

- Do not expose the camera to strong impact as this could cause a malfunction. If this happens, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

Driving assist systems

To help enhance driving safety and performance, the following systems operate automatically in response to various driving situations. Be aware, however, that these systems are supplementary and should not be relied upon too heavily when operating the vehicle.

ECB (Electronically Controlled Brake System)

The electronically controlled system generates braking force corresponding to the brake operation

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)

Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if the brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface

Brake assist

Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is depressed when the system detects a panic stop situation

◆ VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)

Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning on slippery road surfaces

Provides cooperative control of the ABS, TRC, VSC and EPS.

Helps to maintain directional stability when swerving on slippery road surfaces by controlling steering performance

- TRC (Traction Control)

Helps to maintain drive power and prevent the drive wheels from spinning when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads

Hill-start assist control

Helps to prevent the vehicle from rolling backward when starting on an incline

EPS (Electric Power Steering)

Employs an electric motor to reduce the amount of effort needed to turn the steering wheel

◆ Emergency brake signal

When the brakes are applied suddenly, the turn signal lights automatically flash to alert the vehicle behind.

When the TRC/VSC/ABS systems are operating

The slip indicator light will flash while the TRC/VSC/ABS systems are operating.

Disabling the TRC system

If the vehicle gets stuck in mud, dirt or snow, the TRC system may reduce power from the hybrid system to the wheels. Pressing turn the system off may make it easier for you to rock the vehicle in order to free it.

To turn the TRC system off, quickly press and release .

The "Traction Control Turned Off" will be shown on the multi-information display.

Press again to turn the system back on.

■Turning off both TRC and VSC systems

To turn the TRC and VSC systems off, press and hold for more than 3 seconds while the vehicle is stopped.

The VSC OFF indicator light will come on and the “Traction Control Turned Off” will be shown on the multi-information display.*

Press again to turn the systems back on.

*: On vehicles with a PCS (Pre-Collision System), the pre-collision brake assist and pre-collision braking functions will also be disabled. (→P. 189)

When the message is displayed on the multi-information display showing that TRC has been disabled even if has not been pressed

TRC and hill-start assist control cannot be operated. Contact your Toyota dealer.

■ Sounds and vibrations caused by the ABS, brake assist, TRC and VSC systems

Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are operating. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred.

● Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.
● A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop.
●The brake pedal may pulsate slightly after the ABS is activated.
●The brake pedal may move down slightly after the ABS is activated.

■ ECB operating sound

ECB operating sound may be heard in the following cases, but it does not indicate that a malfunction has occurred.

• Operating sound heard from the engine compartment when the brake pedal is operated.
• Motor sound of the brake system heard from the front part of the vehicle when the driver's door is opened.
• Operating sound heard from the engine compartment when one or two minutes passed after the stop of the hybrid system.

EPS operation sound

When the steering wheel is operated, a motor sound (whirring sound) may be heard. This does not indicate a malfunction.

■Automatic reactivation of TRC and VSC systems

After turning the TRC and VSC systems off, the systems will be automatically re-enabled in the following situations:

• When the power switch is turned off
• If only the TRC system is turned off, the TRC will turn on when vehicle speed increases
  If both the TRC and VSC systems are turned off, automatic re-enabling will not occur when vehicle speed increases.

■Reduced effectiveness of the EPS system

The effectiveness of the EPS system is reduced to prevent the system from overheating when there is frequent steering input over an extended period of time. The steering wheel may feel heavy as a result. Should this occur, refrain from excessive steering input or stop the vehicle and turn the hybrid system off. The EPS system should return to normal within 10 minutes.

- Operating conditions of hill-start assist control

When the following four conditions are met, the hill-start assist control will operate:

• The shift position is in other than P or N (when starting off forward/backward on an upward incline).
  ●The vehicle is stopped.
  ●The accelerator pedal is not depressed.
  ●The parking brake is not engaged.

■ Automatic system cancelation of hill-start assist control

The hill-start assist control will turn off in any of the following situations:

●The shift position is moved to P or N.
●The accelerator pedal is depressed.
●The parking brake is engaged.
- Approximately 2 seconds elapse after the brake pedal is released.

■ Operating conditions of emergency brake signal

When the following three conditions are met, the emergency brake signal will operate:

The emergency flashers are off.
Actual vehicle speed is over 55 km/h (35 mph).
The brake pedal is depressed in a manner that cause the system to judge from the vehicle deceleration that this is a sudden braking operation.

■ Automatic system cancelation of emergency brake signal

The emergency brake signal will turn off in any of the following situations:

●The emergency flashers are turned on.
●The brake pedal is released.
●The system judges from the vehicle deceleration that is not a sudden braking operation.

WARNING

■The ABS does not operate effectively when

●The limits of tire gripping performance have been exceeded (such as excessively worn tires on a snow covered road).
●The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on wet or slick roads.

■ Stopping distance when the ABS is operating may exceed that of normal conditions

The ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle's stopping distance. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you, especially in the following situations:

●When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads
- When driving with tire chains
- When driving over bumps in the road
- When driving over roads with potholes or uneven surfaces

■TRC may not operate effectively when

Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slippery road surfaces, even if the TRC system is operating.

Drive the vehicle carefully in conditions where stability and power may be lost.

■Hill- start assist control does not operate effectively when

• Do not overly rely on hill-start assist control. Hill-start assist control may not operate effectively on steep inclines and roads covered with ice.
  ●Unlike the parking brake, hill-start assist control is not intended to hold the vehicle stationary for an extended period of time. Do not attempt to use hill-start assist control to hold the vehicle on an incline, as doing so may lead to an accident.

■When the VSC is activated

The slip indicator light flashes. Always drive carefully. Reckless driving may cause an accident. Exercise particular care when the indicator light flashes.

■When the TRC/VSC systems are turned off

Be especially careful and drive at a speed appropriate to the road conditions. As these are the systems to help ensure vehicle stability and driving force, do not turn the TRC/VSC systems off unless necessary.

WARNING

■Replacing tires

Make sure that all tires are of the specified size, brand, tread pattern and total load capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the recommended tire inflation pressure level.

The ABS, TRC and VSC systems will not function correctly if different tires are installed on the vehicle.

Contact your Toyota dealer for further information when replacing tires or wheels.

■Handling of tires and the suspension

Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will affect the driving assist systems, and may cause a system to malfunction.

Hybrid vehicle driving tips

For economical and ecological driving, pay attention to the following points:

◆ Using Eco drive mode

When using Eco drive mode, the torque corresponding to the accelerator pedal depression amount can be generated more smoothly than it is in normal conditions. In addition, the operation of the air conditioning system (heating/cooling) will be minimized, improving the fuel economy. ( P. 327)

◆ Use of Hybrid System Indicator

The Eco-friendly driving is possible by keeping the indicate of Hybrid System Indicator within Eco area. ( P. 83)

Shift lever operation

Shift the shift position to D when stopped at a traffic light, or driving in heavy traffic etc. Shift the shift position to P when parking. When using the N, there is no positive effect on fuel consumption. In the N, the gasoline engine operates but electricity cannot be generated. Also, when using the air conditioning system, etc., the hybrid battery (traction battery) power is consumed.

- Accelerator pedal/brake pedal operation

●Drive your vehicle smoothly. Avoid abrupt acceleration and deceleration. Gradual acceleration and deceleration will make more effective use of the electric motor (traction motor) without having to use gasoline engine power.
●Avoid repeated acceleration. Repeated acceleration consumes hybrid battery (traction battery) power, resulting in poor fuel consumption. Battery power can be restored by driving with the accelerator pedal slightly released.

When braking

Make sure to operate the brakes gently and in a timely manner. A greater amount of electrical energy can be regenerated when slowing down.

Delays

Repeated acceleration and deceleration, as well as long waits at traffic lights, will lead to bad fuel economy. Check traffic reports before leaving and avoid delays as much as possible. When driving in a traffic jam, gently release the brake pedal to allow the vehicle to move forward slightly while avoiding overuse of the accelerator pedal. Doing so can help control excessive gasoline consumption.

Highway driving

Control and maintain the vehicle at a constant speed. Before stopping at a toll booth or similar, allow plenty of time to release the accelerator and gently apply the brakes. A greater amount of electrical energy can be regenerated when slowing down.

Air conditioning

Use the air conditioning only when necessary. Doing so can help reduce excessive gasoline consumption.

In summer: When the ambient temperature is high, use the recirculated air mode. Doing so will help to reduce the burden on the air conditioning system and reduce fuel consumption as well.

In winter: Because the gasoline engine will not automatically cut out until it and the interior of the vehicle are warm, it will consume fuel. Also, fuel consumption can be improved by avoiding overuse of the heater.

Checking tire inflation pressure

Make sure to check the tire inflation pressure frequently. Improper tire inflation pressure can cause poor fuel economy.

Also, as snow tires can cause large amounts of friction, their use on dry roads can lead to poor fuel economy. Use tires that are appropriate for the season.

Luggage

Carrying heavy luggage will lead to poor fuel economy. Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage. Installing a large roof rack will also cause poor fuel economy.

◆ Warming up before driving

Since the gasoline engine starts up and cuts out automatically when cold, warming up the engine is unnecessary. Moreover, frequently driving short distances will cause the engine to repeatedly warm up, which can lead to excess fuel consumption.

Winter driving tips

Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before driving the vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a manner appropriate to the prevailing weather conditions.

Preparation for winter

• Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside temperatures.
• Engine oil
  • Engine/power control unit coolant
• Washer fluid
  ● Have a service technician inspect the condition of the 12-volt battery.
  ●Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires or purchase a set of tire chains for the front tires.

Ensure that all tires are the same size and brand, and that chains match the size of the tires.

Before driving the vehicle

Perform the following according to the driving conditions:

• Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is frozen. Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice. Wipe away the water immediately to prevent it from freezing.
  ●To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan, remove any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents in front of the windshield.
• Check for and remove any excess ice or snow that may have accumulated on the exterior lights, vehicle's roof, chassis, around the tires or on the brakes.
• Remove any snow or mud from the bottom of your shoes before getting in the vehicle.

When driving the vehicle

Accelerate the vehicle slowly, keep a safe distance between you and the vehicle ahead, and drive at a reduced speed suitable to road conditions.

When parking the vehicle

Park the vehicle and shift the shift position to P without setting the parking brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it from being released. If the vehicle is parked without setting the parking brake, make sure to block the wheels.

Failure to do so may be dangerous because it may cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly, possibly leading to an accident.

Selecting tire chains

Use the correct tire chain size when mounting the tire chains.

Chain size is regulated for each tire size.

Side chain:

① 3 mm (0.12 in.) in diameter
② 10 mm (0.39 in.) in width
③ 30 mm (1.18 in.) in length

Cross chain:

④ 4 mm (0.16 in.) in diameter
⑤ 14 mm (0.55 in.) in width
⑥ 25 mm (0.98 in.) in length

Regulations on the use of tire chains

Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary depending on location and type of road. Always check local regulations before installing chains.

Tire chain installation

Observe the following precautions when installing and removing chains:

● Install and remove tire chains in a safe location.
● Install tire chains on the front tires. Do not install tire chains on the rear tires.
● Install tire chains on front tires as tightly as possible. Retighten chains after driving 0.5 — 1.0 km (1/4 — 1/2 mile).
● Install tire chains following the instructions provided with the tire chains.

WARNING

■Driving with snow tires

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.

Failure to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or serious injury.

● Use tires of the specified size.
●Maintain the recommended level of air pressure.
- Do not drive at speeds in excess of the speed limit or the speed limit specified for the snow tires being used.
●Use snow tires on all, not just some wheels.

■Driving with tire chains

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.

Failure to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely, and may cause death or serious injury.

• Do not drive in excess of the speed limit specified for the tire chains being used, or 50 km/h (30 mph), whichever is lower.
  ●Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces or over potholes.
  ● Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt steering, sudden braking and shifting operations that cause sudden engine braking.
• Slow down sufficiently before entering a curve to ensure that vehicle control is maintained.

Not for Reproduction

5-1. Using the audio system

Audio system types.....226

5-2. Basic Operations

Audio system ......227

Steering wheel audio switches....230

USB/AUX port......231

Basic audio operations....232

5-3. Setup

Setup menu ......234

General settings.....235

Audio settings.....237

Display settings.....238

5-4. Using the audio system

Selecting the audio source....240

List screen operation .....241

Optimal use of the audio system ....243

5-5. Using the radio

Radio operation ......245

Audio system

5

5-6. Playing an audio CD and MP3/WMA discs

CD player operation......247

5-7. Using an external device

Listening to an iPod......254

Listening to a USB memory device......260

Using the AUX port......266

5-8. Connecting Bluetooth®

Preparations to use wireless communication ....267

Registering a Bluetooth ^® audio player for the first time....270

Registering a Bluetooth ^® phone for the first time....271

Registering a Bluetooth ^® device....272

Connecting a Bluetooth ^® device....275

Displaying a Bluetooth ^® device details.....277

Detailed Bluetooth ^® system settings.....279

5-9. Bluetooth® Audio

Listening to Bluetooth ^® audio.....281

5-10. Bluetooth® Phone

Using a Bluetooth ^® phone.....283

Making a call....285

Receiving a call....290

Speaking on the telephone....291

Bluetooth ^® phone message function .....295

Using the steering wheel switches .....299

Bluetooth ^® phone settings ....300

5-11. Contact

Contact/Call history settings ....302

5-12. Bluetooth®

What to do if... (Troubleshooting) .....311

Bluetooth ^® 315

Audio system types

▶ Vehicles with "CAR" button

CTH52AP120

▶ Vehicles with "APPS" button

Owners of models equipped with a navigation/multimedia system should refer to the “Navigation and Multimedia System Owner's Manual”.

■ Using cellular phones

Interference may be heard through the audio system's speakers if a cellular phone is being used inside or close to the vehicle while the audio system is operating.

About Bluetooth®

The Bluetooth wordmark and logo are owned by Bluetooth SIG. and permission has been granted to use the trademark of the licensee Panasonic Corporation. Other trademarks and trade names are owned by various different owners.

NOTICE

■To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

Do not leave the audio system on longer than necessary when the hybrid system is off.

■To avoid damaging the audio system

Take care not to spill drinks or other fluids over the audio system.

Audio system

Operations such as listening to audio, using the hands-free phone and changing audio settings are started by using the following buttons.

Audio system operation buttons

"AUDIO" button

Display the "Select audio source" screen or audio top screen.

(→P. 240)

"SETUP" button

Press this button to customize the function settings. (→P. 234)

button
Press this button to access the Bluetooth® hands-free system. (→P. 283)
"CAR" button
Press this button to access the vehicle information. (→P. 91)

CTH52AP121

Operating the touch screen

By touching the screen with your finger, you can control the audio system etc.

Drag\*

Touch the screen with your finger, and move the screen to the desired position.

- Scrolling the lists

Flick\*

Touch the screen with your finger and quickly move the screen by flicking your finger.

- Scrolling the main screen page

*: The above operations may not be performed on all screens.

■Capacitive touch switches

The control panel uses capacitive touch sensors.

- In the following cases, incorrect operation or non-response may occur.

• If the operating section is dirty or has liquid attached to it, incorrect operation or non-response may occur.
• If the operating section receives electromagnetic waves, incorrect operation or non-response may occur.
• If wearing gloves during operation, non-response may occur.
• If fingernails are used to operate the system, non-response may occur.
• If a touch pen is used to operate the system, non-response may occur.
• If the palm of your hand touches the operating section during operation, incorrect operation may occur.
• If the palm of your hand touches the operating section, incorrect operation may occur.
• If operations are performed quickly, non-response may occur.

Please do not reach your hand to the part of button when audio system turn on. Because the button may become unresponsive for a while. But it will be back to normal for a given time even if audio system turned on under the condition.

■When using the touch screen

• If the screen is cold, the display may be dark, or the system may seem to be operating slightly slower than normal.
• The screen may seem dark and hard to see when viewed through sunglasses. Change your angle of viewing, adjust the display on the “Display settings” screen (→P. 238) or remove your sunglasses.
  ●Flick operations may not be performed smoothly in high altitudes.

NOTICE

■To avoid damaging the touch screen

● To prevent damaging the screen, lightly touch the screen buttons with your finger.
- Do not use objects other than your finger to touch the screen.
● Wipe off fingerprints using a glass cleaning cloth. Do not use chemical cleaners to clean the screen, as they may damage the touch screen.

Steering wheel audio switches

Some audio features can be controlled using the switches on the steering wheel.

Operation may differ depending on the type of audio system or navigation system. For details, refer to the manual provided with the audio system or navigation system.

Operating the audio system using the steering wheel switches

① Volume switch
• Increases/decreases volume
- Press and hold: Continuously increases/decreases volume
② Cursor switch
- Selects (radio stations/radio presets/tracks/files/songs)

③ “MODE” switch

• Changes audio source

- Press and hold this switch to mute or pause the current operation. To cancel the mute or pause, press and hold.

WARNING

■To reduce the risk of an accident

Exercise care when operating the audio switches on the steering wheel.

USB/AUX port

Connect an iPod, USB memory device or portable audio player to the USB/AUX port as indicated below. Select “iPod”, “USB” or “AUX” on the audio source selection screen and the device can be operated via audio system.

Connecting using the USB/AUX port

iPod

Open the cover and connect an iPod using an iPod cable.

Turn on the power of the iPod if it is not turned on.

USB memory

Open the cover and connect the USB memory device.

Turn on the power of the USB memory device if it is not turned on.

■ Portable audio player

Open the cover and connect the portable audio player.

Turn on the power of the portable audio player if it is not turned on.

WARNING

While driving

Do not connect a device or operate the device controls.

NOTICE

Depending on the size and shape of the device that is connected to the system, the auxiliary box may not close fully. In this case, do not forcibly close the auxiliary box as this may damage the device or the terminal, etc.

Basic audio operations

Basic audio operations and functions common to each mode are explained in this section.

Operating the audio system

Press the “>” or “<” button to select radio station bands, tracks and files. Also the switches can be used to select items in the list display.

Press this button to turn the audio system on and off.

CTH52AP122

Random playback

Select to change on/off.

Repeat play

Select to change on/off.

■ Using cellular phones

Interference may be heard through the audio system's speakers if a cellular phone is being used inside or close to the vehicle while the audio system is operating.

WARNING

Laser product

This product is a class 1 laser product.

Do not open the cover of the player or attempt to repair the unit yourself. Refer servicing to qualified personnel.

NOTICE

■To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

Do not leave the audio system on longer than necessary when the hybrid system is off.

■To avoid damaging the audio system

Take care not to spill drinks or other fluids on the audio system.

Setup menu

You can adjust the audio system to your desired settings.

Display "Setup" screen

Press the "SETUP" button to display the "Setup" screen.

① Select to adjust the settings for operation sounds, screen animation, etc. (→P. 235)
② Select to adjust the settings for contrast and brightness of the screen. (→P. 238)
③ Select to adjust the settings for registering, removing, connecting and disconnecting Bluetooth® devices. (→P. 279)

④ Select to adjust the settings for phone sound, contact, etc. ( P. 302)
⑤ Select to set radio and external media settings. (→P. 237)
⑥ Select to set the vehicle customization. ( P. 457)
⑦ Select to turn the screen off.

General settings

Settings are available for adjusting the operation sounds, screen animation, etc.

Screen for general settings

1 Press the "SETUP" button.
2 Select "General" on the "Setup" screen.

① Select to change the unit of measure for distance/fuel consumption.
② On/off can be selected to sound beeps.
③ Select to change the screen button color.
④ Select to change the keyboard layout.
⑤ Select to change the capacitive touch button sensor sensitivity.

⑥ The animation effect for the screen can be set to on/off.

⑦ Select to delete personal data. (→P. 236)

⑧ Select to update program versions. For details, contact your Toyota dealer.

⑨ Select to display the software information. Notices related to third party software used in this product are enlisted. (This includes instructions for obtaining such software, where applicable.)

⑩ Reset all setup items

Delete personal data

1 Select "Delete personal data" on the "General settings" screen.
2 Select "Delete".

Check carefully beforehand, as data cannot be retrieved once deleted.

3 A confirmation screen will be displayed. Select "Yes".

The following personal data will be deleted or changed to its default settings.

• General settings
• Audio settings
• Telephone settings

Audio settings

Settings are available for adjusting the radio operation, cover art.

Screen for audio settings

1 Press the "SETUP" button.
2 Select "Audio" on the "Setup" screen.

① FM Radio settings ( P. 246)

② Cover art settings on/off

Display settings

Settings are available for adjusting the contrast and brightness of the screen.

Screen for display settings

1 Press the "SETUP" button.
2 Select "Display" on the "Setup" screen.

① Adjust screen contrast/brightness
② Adjust screen contrast/brightness of the rear view monitor camera
③ Changes to day mode.

Adjusting the screen contrast/brightness

1 Select "General" or "Camera" on the "Display settings" screen.
2 Adjust the display as desired by selecting “+” or “-”.

Day mode

When the headlights are turned on, the screen dims.

However, the screen can be switched to day mode by selecting "Day mode".

The screen will stay in day mode when the headlights are turned on until "Day mode" is selected again.

Selecting the audio source

Switching between audio sources such as radio and CD are explained in this section.

Changing audio source

1 Press the “AUDIO” button to display the audio source selection screen. If the audio source selection screen is not displayed, press the “AUDIO” button again.

2 Select the desired audio source.

Reordering the audio source

1 Select "Reorder".
2 Select the desired audio source then or to reorder.

Using the steering wheel switches to change audio source

The audio source changes as follows each time the “MODE” switch is pressed.

List screen operation

When a list screen is displayed, use the appropriate buttons to scroll through the list.

How to scroll

Select to scroll to the next or previous page.

If appears to the right of titles, the complete titles are too long for the display. Select this button to scroll the title.

Selecting, fast-forwarding and reversing tracks/files/songs

■ Selecting a track/file/song

Press the “>” or “<” button on “TUNE·TRACK” to select the desired track/file/song number.

To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold the “>” or “<” button on “TUNE·TRACK”.

■ Selecting a track/file/song from the track/file/song list

1 Select "Browse" or cover art.
2 Select the desired track/file/song.

When an MP3/WMA/AAC disc or USB memory device is being used, the folder can be selected. When a Bluetooth® device or iPod is being used, the album can be selected.

According to the audio device, the following is displayed.

Audio source List name
Audio CD Track
MP3/WMA/AAC disc Folder, File
Bluetooth®	Album, Track
USB	Artists, Albums, Songs, Genres, Composers, Folder
iPod	Artists, Albums, Songs, Genres, Composers, Audiobooks, Videos

Optimal use of the audio system

On the “Sound settings” screen, sound quality (Treble/Mid/Bass), volume balance and ASL settings can be adjusted.

How to adjust the sound settings and sound quality

▶ Tone and balance

1 Select "Sound" to adjust the sound settings.
2 Select "Sound" tab.

⑫23○○ Select “-” or “+” to adjust the treble, mid or bass.
④⑤ Select “Front” or “Rear” to adjust the front/rear audio balance.
⑥⑦ Select “L” or “R” to adjust the left/right audio balance.

▶ Automatic sound leveliser (ASL)
1 Select "DSP" tab.
2 Select "High", "Mid", "Low" or "Off".

■The sound quality level is adjusted individually

The treble, mid and bass levels can be adjusted for each audio mode separately.

■ About Automatic Sound Leveliser (ASL)

ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to the vehicle speed.

Radio operation

Select “AM” or “FM” the audio source selection screen to begin listening to the radio.

Audio control screen

Pressing the “AUDIO” button displays the audio control screen from any screens of the selected source.

① Audio source selection screen appears
② Preset stations
③ Scanning for receivable station
④ Radio settings
⑤ Setting the sound ( P. 243)
⑥ Select to display a list of receivable stations

Selecting a station

Tune in to the desired station using one of the following methods.

- Seek tuning

Press and hold the “>” or “<” button on “TUNE·TRACK”.

The radio will begin seeking up or down for a station of the nearest frequency and will stop when a station is found.

■ Manual tuning

Press the “>” or “<” button on “TUNE-TRACK”.

■ Preset stations

Select the desired preset station.

Setting station presets

1 Search for desired stations by pressing the “>” or “<” button on “TUNE·TRACK”.
2 Select one of the screen buttons and hold it until a beep is heard.

RDS (Radio Data System)

Depending on the availability of RDS infrastructure, the service may not function properly.

FM settings

1 Display the "Setup" screen. (→P. 237)
2 Select "FM Radio settings".

① FM radio text on/off
② Refresh station list

Reception sensitivity

• Maintaining perfect radio reception at all times is difficult due to the continually changing position of the antenna, differences in signal strength and surrounding objects, such as trains, transmitters, etc.
  ● The radio antenna is mounted on the rear side of the roof.

CD player operation

Insert disc or select “CD” on the audio source selection screen with a disc inserted to begin listening to a CD.

Audio control screen

Pressing the “AUDIO” button displays the audio control screen from any screens of the selected source.

① Audio source selection screen appears
② Displaying the track/file list

MP3/WMA/AAC

Displaying the folder list

③ Random playback ( P. 233)
④ Repeat play ( P. 233)
⑤ Pause

Select to resume play

⑥ Setting the sound ( P. 243)

■Displaying the title and artist name

If a CD-TEXT disc is inserted, the title of the disc and track will be displayed.

Error messages

If an error message is displayed, refer to the following table and take the appropriate measures. If the problem is not rectified, take the vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

Message Cause Correction procedures
“Check DISC”	The disc is dirty or damaged.The disc is inserted upside down.The disc is not playable with the player.	Clean the disc.Insert the disc correctly.Confirm the disc is playable with the player.
“Disc Error”	There is a malfunction within the system.	Eject the disc.
“No music files found.”	No playable data is included on the disc.	Eject the disc.

■Discs that can be used

Discs with the marks shown below can be used.

Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc features, or due to scratches, dirt or deterioration.

CDs with copy-protection features may not play correctly.

CD player protection feature

To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when a problem is detected.

If a disc is left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for extended periods

Disc may be damaged and may not play properly.

Lens cleaners

Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player.

■MP3, WMA and AAC files

MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER3) is a standard audio compression format.

Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size by using MP3 compression.

WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.

This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format.

AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and refers to an audio compression technology standard used with MPEG2 and MPEG4.

MP3, WMA and AAC file and media/formats compatibility are limited.

●MP3 file compatibility

- Compatible standards MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF LAYER3)

- Compatible sampling frequencies MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz) MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)

- Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR) MPEG1 LAYER3: 32-320 (kbps) MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 8-160 (kbps)

- Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural

●WMA file compatibility

- Compatible standards WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9 (only compatible with Windows Media Audio Standard)

- Compatible sampling frequencies 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)

- Compatible bit rates (only compatible with 2-channel playback) Ver. 7, 8: CBR 48-192 (kbps) Ver. 9: CBR 48-320 (kbps)

●AAC file compatibility

• Compatible standards MPEG4/AAC-LC
• Compatible sampling frequencies 11.025/12/16/22.05/24/32/44.1/48 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates 16-320 (kbps)
  Compatible channel modes: 1ch and 2ch

- Compatible media

Media that can be used for MP3, WMA and AAC playback are CD-Rs and CD-RWs.

Playback in some instances may not be possible if the CD-R or CD-RW is not finalized. Playback may not be possible or the audio may jump if the disc is scratched or marked with fingerprints.

●Compatible disc formats

The following disc formats can be used.

• Disc formats:
  CD-ROM Mode 1 and Mode 2
  CD-ROM XA Mode 2, Form 1 and Form 2

- File formats: ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, (Romeo, Joliet) UDF (2.01 or lower)

MP3, WMA and AAC files written in any format other than those listed above may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be displayed correctly.

Items related to standards and limitations are as follows.

• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels (including the root)
• Maximum length of folder names/file names: 32 characters
• Maximum number of folders: 192 (including the root)
• Maximum number of files per disc: 255

File names

The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA/AAC and played are those with the extension .mp3, .wma or .m4a.

● Discs containing multi-session recordings

As the audio system is compatible with multi session discs, it is possible to play discs that contain MP3, WMA and AAC files. However, only the first session can be played.

ID3, WMA and AAC tags

ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title, artist name, etc.

The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags. (The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)

WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.

AAC tags can be added to AAC files, making it possible to record the track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.

●MP3, WMA and AAC playback

When a disc containing MP3, WMA or AAC files is inserted, all files on the disc are first checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3, WMA or AAC file is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend you do not write any files to the disc other than MP3, WMA or AAC files or create any unnecessary folders.

Discs that contain a mixture of music data and MP3, WMA or AAC format data cannot be played.

• Extensions

If the file extensions .mp3, .wma and .m4a are used for files other than MP3, WMA and AAC files, they may be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3, WMA and AAC files. This may result in large amounts of interference and damage to the speakers.

●Playback

• To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate of at least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.
• CD-R or CD-RW playback may not be possible in some instances, depending on the characteristics of the disc.
• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3, WMA and AAC files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at all.
• When files other than MP3, WMA or AAC files are recorded on a disc, it may take more time to recognize the disc and in some cases, playback may not be possible at all.
• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.

NOTICE

■Discs and adapters that cannot be used

Do not use the following types of CDs.

Also, do not use 8 cm (3 in.) CD adapters, DualDiscs or printable discs.

Doing so may damage the CD player and/or the CD insert/eject function.

●Discs that have a diameter that is not 12 cm (4.7 in.).
● Low-quality or deformed discs.
●Discs with a transparent or translucent recording area.
● Discs that have tape, stickers or CD-R labels attached to them, or that have had the label peeled off.

Player precautions

Failure to follow the precautions below may result in damage to the discs or the player itself.

• Do not insert anything other than discs into the disc slot.
• Do not apply oil to the player.
• Store discs away from direct sunlight.
  ●Never try to disassemble any part of the player.

Listening to an iPod

Connecting an iPod enables you to enjoy music from the vehicle speakers.

Select "iPod" on the audio source selection screen.

When the iPod connected to the system includes iPod video, the system can only output the sound by selecting the browse screen.

Connecting an iPod

→P.231

Audio control screen

Pressing the “AUDIO” button displays the audio control screen from any screens of the selected source.

① Audio source selection screen appears
② Setting the sound ( P. 243)
③ Pause
Select to resume playback
④ Repeat play ( P. 255)
⑤ Shuffle play ( P. 255)
⑥ Selecting the play mode ( P. 255)
⑦ Audio setting
⑧ Displays cover art

Selecting a play mode

1 Select "Browse" on the screen.
2 Select the desired play mode. Then select a song to begin using the selected play mode.

Shuffle play

Select to change on/off.

Repeat play

Select to change on/off.

About iPod

Made for

iPod

iPhone

• “Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod or iPhone, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards.
• Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod or iPhone, may affect wireless performance.
• iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Lightning is a trademark of Apple Inc.

■ iPod cover art

● Depending on the iPod and songs in the iPod, iPod cover art may be displayed.
● This function can be changed to on/off. (→P. 237)
- It may take time to display iPod cover art, and the iPod may not be operated while the cover art display is in process.
- Only iPod cover art that is saved in JPEG format can be displayed.

■ iPod functions

• When an iPod is connected and the audio source is changed to iPod mode, the iPod will resume play from the same point in which it was last used.

• Depending on the iPod that is connected to the system, certain functions may not be available. If a function is unavailable due to a malfunction (as opposed to a system specification), disconnecting the device and reconnecting it may resolve the problem.

• While connected to the system, the iPod cannot be operated with its own controls. It is necessary to use the controls of the vehicle's audio system instead.

• When the battery level of an iPod is very low, the iPod may not operate. If so, charge the iPod before use.
  ● Compatible models ( P. 258)

■iPod problems

To resolve most problems encountered when using your iPod, disconnect your iPod from the vehicle iPod connection and reset it. For instructions on how to reset your iPod, refer to your iPod Owner's Manual.

Error messages

Message Cause/Correction procedures
“Connection error. Please consult your Owner's Manual for instructions on how to connect the iPod.”	This indicates a problem in the iPod or its connection.
“No music files found.”	This indicates that there is no music data in the iPod.
“No video files found.”	This indicates that no video files are included in the iPod.
“There are no songs available for playback. Please add compatible files to your iPod.”	This indicates that songs are not found in a selected playlist.
“iPod authorization unsuccessful.”	This indicates that the audio system failed to authorize the iPod.Please check your iPod.

■ Compatible models

The following iPod ^® , iPod nano ^® , iPod classic ^® , iPod touch ^® and iPhone ^® devices can be used with this system.

●Made for

• iPod touch (5th generation)
• iPod touch (4th generation)
• iPod touch (3rd generation)
• iPod touch (2nd generation)
• iPod touch (1st generation)
• iPod classic
• iPod with video
• iPod nano (7th generation)
• iPod nano (6th generation)
• iPod nano (5th generation)
• iPod nano (4th generation)
• iPod nano (3rd generation)
• iPod nano (2nd generation)
• iPod nano (1st generation)
• iPhone 5
• iPhone 4S
• iPhone 4
• iPhone 3GS
• iPhone 3G
• iPhone

Depending on differences between models or software versions etc., some models might be incompatible with this system.

WARNING

While driving

Do not connect an iPod or operate the controls.

NOTICE

■To prevent damage to the iPod or its terminals

• Do not leave the iPod in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the iPod.
• Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the iPod while it is connected.
• Do not insert foreign objects into the port.

Listening to a USB memory device

Connecting a USB memory device enables you to enjoy music from the vehicle speakers.

Select "USB" on the audio source selection screen.

Connecting a USB memory device

→P.231

Audio control screen

Pressing the “AUDIO” button displays the audio control screen from any screens of the selected source.

① Audio source selection screen appears
② Audio setting
③ Displaying the folder list
④ Random playback ( P. 233)
⑤ Repeat play ( P. 233)
⑥ Pause

Select to resume playback

⑦ Setting the sound ( P. 243)

Selecting a play mode

1 Select "Browse" on the screen.
2 Select the desired play mode. Then select a song to begin using the selected play mode.

■ Displaying the now playing list

Touch the cover art display.

USB memory functions

● Depending on the USB memory device that is connected to the system, the device itself may not be operable and certain functions may not be available. If the device is inoperable or a function is unavailable due to a malfunction (as opposed to a system specification), disconnecting the device and reconnecting it may resolve the problem.
- If the USB memory device still does not begin operation after being disconnected and reconnected, format the memory.

■Error messages for USB memory

Message Cause/Correction procedures
“Connection error. Please consult your Owner’s Manual for instructions on how to connect the USB device.”	This indicates a problem with the USB memory device or its connection.
“There are no files available for playback. Please add compatible files to your USB device.”	This indicates that no MP3/WMA/AAC files are included on the USB memory device.

USB memory

●Compatible devices

USB memory device that can be used for MP3, WMA and AAC playback.

● Compatible device formats

The following device format can be used:

• USB communication format: USB2.0 HS (480 Mbps) and FS (12 Mbps)
• File system format: FAT16/32 (Windows)
  • Correspondence class: Mass storage class

MP3, WMA and AAC files written to a device with any format other than those listed above may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be displayed correctly.

Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:

• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels
• Maximum number of folders in a device: 3000 (including the root)
• Maximum number of files in a device: 9999
• Maximum number of files per folder: 255

●MP3, WMA and AAC files

MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format.

Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size using MP3 compression.

WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format. This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format.

AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and refers to an audio compression technology standard used with MPEG2 and MPEG4.

MP3, WMA and AAC file and media/formats compatibility are limited.

●MP3 file compatibility

• Compatible standards MP3 (MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III, MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III)
• Compatible sampling frequencies MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz) MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR) MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32-320 (kbps) MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 8-160 (kbps)
• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural

●WMA file compatibility

• Compatible standards WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9
• Compatible sampling frequencies HIGH PROFILE 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates HIGH PROFILE 48-320 (kbps, VBR)

●AAC file compatibility

• Compatible standards MPEG4/AAC-LC
• Compatible sampling frequencies 11.025/12/16/22.05/24/32/44.1/48 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates 16-320 (kbps)
• Compatible channel modes: 1 ch and 2 ch

- File names

The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA/AAC and played are those with the extension .mp3, .wma or .m4a.

ID3, WMA and AAC tags

ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title, artist name, etc.

The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags. (The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)

WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.

AAC tags can be added to AAC files, making it possible to record the track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.

●MP3, WMA and AAC playback

• When a device containing MP3, WMA and AAC files is connected, all files in the USB memory device are checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3, WMA and AAC file is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend that you do not include any files other than MP3, WMA and AAC files or create any unnecessary folders.
• When a USB memory device is connected and the audio source is changed to USB memory mode, the USB memory device will start playing the first file in the first folder. If the same device is removed and reconnected (and the con- tents have not been changed), the USB memory device will resume play from the same point in which it was last used.

• Extensions

If the file extensions .mp3, .wma and .m4a are used for files other than MP3, WMA and AAC files, they will be skipped (not played).

●Playback

• To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate of at least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.
• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3, WMA and AAC files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at all.
• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.

WARNING

■While driving

Do not connect a USB memory device or operate the device controls.

NOTICE

■To prevent damage to the USB memory device or its terminals

• Do not leave the USB memory device in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the USB memory device.
• Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the USB memory device while it is connected.
• Do not insert foreign objects into the port.

Using the AUX port

To use the AUX port, connect a portable player, press the "AUDIO" button, then select "AUX" to display the audio control screen.

Connecting a portable audio player

→P.231

- Operating portable audio players connected to the audio system

The volume can be adjusted using the vehicle's audio controls. All other adjustments must be made on the portable audio player itself.

- When using a portable audio player connected to the power outlet

Noise may occur during playback. Use the power source of the portable audio player.

WARNING

While driving

Do not connect a portable audio player or operate the device controls.

Preparations to use wireless communication

The following can be performed using Bluetooth ^® wireless communication:

A portable audio player can be operated and listened to via audio system
- Hands-free phone calls can be made via a cellular phone in order to use wireless communication, register and connect a Bluetooth® device by performing the following procedures.

Device registration/connection flow

1. Register the Bluetooth ^ device to be used with audio system (→P. 270, 271, 272)

1. Connect the Bluetooth ^ device to be used (→P. 275)

To be used for audio To be used for hands-free

phone

1. Start Bluetooth ^® connection (→P. 275)

2. Start Bluetooth ^® connection (→P. 275)

1. Check connection status (→P. 281)

2. Check connection status (→P. 284)

1. Use Bluetooth ^ audio (→P. 281)

2. Use Bluetooth ^ phone (→P. 283)

Registering and connecting from the "Bluetooth\* setup" screen

To display the screen shown below, press the "SETUP" button and select "Bluetooth*" on the "Setup" screen.

① Select to connect the device to be used with audio system. (→P. 275)
② Select to register a Bluetooth® device to be used with audio system. (→P. 272)
③ Select to set detailed Bluetooth® system settings. (→P. 279)
④ Select to delete registered devices. (→P. 274) *: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

Registering a Bluetooth® audio player for the first time

To use the Bluetooth ^® Audio, it is necessary to register an audio player with the system.

Once the player has been registered, it is possible to use the Bluetooth® Audio.

For details about registering a Bluetooth ^® device ( P. 272)

1 Turn the Bluetooth® connection setting of your audio player on.
2 Press the "AUDIO" button.
3 Select "Audio".
4 Select "Connect".
5 Follow the steps in “How to register a Bluetooth® device” from “STEP 2”. (→P. 272)

Registering a Bluetooth ^® phone for the first time

To use the hands-free system, it is necessary to register a Bluetooth ^® phone with the system.

Once the telephone has been registered, it is possible to use the hands-free system.

For details about registering a Bluetooth ^® device (→P. 272)

1 Turn the Bluetooth® connection setting of your cellular phone on.
2 Press the "button.
3 Select "OK" to register a telephone.
4 Follow the steps in “How to register a Bluetooth® device” from “STEP 3”. (→P. 272)

Registering a Bluetooth® device

Bluetooth® compatible phones (HFP) and portable audio players (AVP) can be registered simultaneously. You can register up to 5 Bluetooth® devices.

How to register a Bluetooth® device

1 Display the "Bluetooth* setup" screen. (→P. 269)
2 Select "Add".

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

3 When this screen is displayed, search for the device name displayed on this screen on the screen of your Bluetooth® device.

For details about operating the Bluetooth® device, see the manual that comes with it.

To cancel the registration, select "Cancel".

4 Register the Bluetooth® device using your Bluetooth® device.

A PIN-code is not required for SSP (Secure Simple Pairing) compatible Bluetooth ^® devices. Depending on the type of Bluetooth ^® device being connected, a message confirming registration may be displayed on the Bluetooth ^® device's screen. Respond and operate the Bluetooth ^® device according to the confirmation message.

5 Check that the following screen is displayed when registration is complete.

6 Select "OK" when the connection status changes from "Connecting..." to "Connected".

If an error message is displayed, follow the guidance on the screen to try again.

Registration can be performed from screens other than the "Bluetooth* setup" screen.

■ When registering from the "Bluetooth* audio" screen

1 Display the "Bluetooth* audio" screen. (→P. 240)
2 Select "Connect".
3 Follow the steps in "How to register a Bluetooth® device" from "STEP 2". (→P. 272)

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

Deleting a Bluetooth® device

1 Display the "Bluetooth* setup" screen. (→P. 269)
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
2 Select "Remove".

3 Select the desired device.

4 A confirmation message will be displayed, select "Yes" to delete the device.
5 Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the operation is complete.

Connecting a Bluetooth® device

Up to 5 Bluetooth ^® devices (Telephones (HFP) and audio players (AVP)) can be registered.

If more than 1 Bluetooth® device has been registered, select which device to connect to.

1 Press the "SETUP" button.
2 Select "Bluetooth*".

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

3 Select the device to be connected.

Supported profile icons will be displayed.

① Telephone
② Audio player

Supported profile icons for currently connected devices will illuminate.

Dimmed icons can be selected to connect to the function directly.

Auto connection

To turn auto connection mode on, set "Bluetooth* power" to on.

(→P. 279)

When you register a telephone, auto connection will be activated. Always set it to this mode and leave the Bluetooth ^® phone in a place where a connection can be established.

When the power switch is turned to the ACCESSORY or ON mode, the system will search for a nearby cellular phone you have registered.

Next, the system automatically connects with the most recent of the telephones connected to in the past. Then, the connection result is displayed.

Manual connection

When auto connection has failed or “Bluetooth* power” is turned off, you must connect the Bluetooth® device manually.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

Follow the steps in “Connecting a Bluetooth ^® device” from “STEP 2”. (→P. 275)

Connecting a Bluetooth ^® audio player

▶ Registering an additional device

1 Select "Select device" on the Bluetooth® audio control screen.
2 For more information: →P. 272
▶ Selecting a registered device
1 Select "Select device" on the Bluetooth® audio control screen.
2 For more information: →P. 275

Reconnecting a Bluetooth ^® phone

If the system cannot connect due to poor signal strength with the power switch in the ACCESSORY or ON mode, the system will automatically attempt to reconnect.

If the telephone is turned off, the system will not attempt to reconnect. In this case, the connection must be made manually, or the telephone must be reselected.

Displaying a Bluetooth® device details

You can confirm and change the registered device details.

Bluetooth ^® device registration status

1 Display the "Bluetooth* setup" screen. (→P. 269)

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

2 Select the device.
3 Select "Device info".
4 Following screen is displayed:

① Change device name
② Change connection method ( P. 278)
③ Bluetooth® address
④ Display your telephone number

The number may not be displayed depending on the model of telephone.

⑤ Compatibility profile of the device
⑥ Restore default settings

Changing connection method

1 Select "Connect audio player from".
2 Select "Vehicle" or "Device".

"Vehicle": Connect the audio system to the portable audio player.

"Device": Connect the portable audio player to the audio system.

Detailed Bluetooth® system settings

You can confirm and change the detailed Bluetooth® settings.

How to check and change detailed Bluetooth® settings

1 Display the "Bluetooth* setup" screen. (→P. 269)
2 Select "System settings".
3 The following screen is displayed:

① Bluetooth® power on/off You can change Bluetooth® function on/off
② Change Bluetooth® name
③ Change PIN-code ( P. 280)
④ Bluetooth® address
⑤ Display telephone status

Select to set the phone connection status display on/off.

⑥ Display audio player status

Select to set the connection status display of the audio player on/off.

⑦ Compatibility profile of the system
⑧ Restore default settings

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

Editing the Bluetooth\* PIN

You can change the PIN-code that is used to register your Bluetooth ^® devices in the system.

1 Select "Bluetooth* PIN".
2 Input a PIN-code, and select "OK".
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

Listening to Bluetooth® audio

The Bluetooth ^® audio system enables the user to enjoy music played on a portable player from the vehicle speakers via wireless communication.

When a Bluetooth ^® device cannot be connected, check the connection status on the “Bluetooth* audio” screen. If the device is not connected, either register or reconnect the device. (→P. 275)

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

Status display

You can check such indicators as signal strength and battery charge on the screen.

① Battery charge
② Connection status

Indicators Conditions
Battery charge	Full Empty→
Connection status	Good Not connected→

Playing Bluetooth® audio

Select

to

Play/Pause.

For details on “Bluetooth* audio” screen operation methods, refer to Basic Audio Operations. (→P. 232)

For details on how to select a track or album, refer to selecting, fast-forwarding and reversing tracks/files/songs. ( P. 242)

* : Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

Using a Bluetooth® phone

The hands-free system is a function that allows you to use your cellular phone without touching it.

This system supports Bluetooth®. Bluetooth® is a wireless data system that allows the cellular phone to wirelessly connect to the hands-free system and make/receive calls.

Before making a telephone call, check the connection status, battery charge, call area and signal strength. (→P. 284)

If a Bluetooth ^® device cannot be connected, check the connection status on the telephone top screen. If the device is not connected, either register or reconnect it. ( P. 271)

Telephone top screen

To display the screen shown below, press the "c" button.

Several functions are available to operate on each screen that is displayed by selecting the 4 tabs.

① Device name
② Bluetooth® connection status
③ Select to make a call

■ Microphone

The vehicle's built in micro-phone is used when talking on the phone. The person you are speaking to can be heard from the front speakers.

To use the hands-free system, you must register your Bluetooth® phone in the system. (→P. 271)

Status display

You can check indicators such as signal strength and battery charge on the telephone top screen.

Indicators Conditions
1Connection status	Good Not connected
2Signal strength	Excellent Poor
3Battery charge	Full Empty

Making a call

Once a Bluetooth ^® phone is registered, you can make a call using the following procedure:

Dialing

1 Display the telephone top screen. (→P. 283)
2 Select the "Dial pad" tab and enter a telephone number.

To delete the input telephone number, select

For the first digit, you can enter “+” by selecting “*” for a while.

3 Press the switch on the steering wheel or select

Dialing from the contacts list

You can dial a number from the contact data imported from your cellular phone. The system has one contact for each registered telephone. Up to 2500 contacts may be stored in each contact. ( P. 286)

1 Display the telephone top screen. (→P. 283)
2 Select "Contacts" tab.
3 Choose the desired contact to call from the list.

4 Choose the number and then press the switch on the steering wheel or select

When the contact is empty

You can transfer the telephone numbers in a Bluetooth® phone to the system.

Operation methods differ between PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) compatible and PBAP incompatible Bluetooth® phones. If the cellular phone does not support either PBAP or OPP (Object Push Profile) service, you cannot transfer contacts.

1 Press the switch on the steering wheel.

If the phonebook is empty, a message will be displayed.

For a PBAP compatible Bluetooth® phone and “Automatic Contact/History Transfer” is off

2 Select the desired item.

① Select to transfer new contacts from a cellular phone, select “Always” and then enable “Automatic contact/history transfer”.

② Select to transfer all the contacts from a connected cellular phone only once.

③ Select to cancel transferring.

For PBAP incompatible but OPP compatible Bluetooth® phones

2 Select the desired item.

① Select to transfer the contacts from the connected cellular phone.
② Select to add a new contact manually.
③ Select to cancel transferring.

▶ When "Transfer" is selected

3 Follow the steps in “Update contacts from telephone” from “STEP2”. (→P. 303)
When "Add" is selected
3 Follow the steps in "Registering a new contact to the contact list" from "STEP2". (→P. 304)

Calling using favorites list

You can make a call using numbers registered in the contact.

2 Select "Favorites" tab.
3 Select the desired number to make a call.

1 Display the telephone top screen. (→P. 283)

Dialing from call history

You can make a call using the call history, which has the 3 functions below.

: calls which you missed
: calls which you received
: calls which you made

1 Display the telephone top screen. (→P. 283)

2 Select "Call history" tab.

3 Select or the desired entry from the list.

When selected
4 Check that the "Call" screen is displayed.
▶ When the desired contact is selected
4 Select the desired number.
5 Check that the "Call" screen is displayed.

Call history list

• If you make a call to or receive a call from a number registered in the contact, the name is displayed in the call history.
• If you make multiple calls to the same number, only the last call made is displayed in the call history.

International calls

You may not be able to make international calls, depending on the mobile phone in use.

Receiving a call

When a call is received, the following screen is displayed together with a sound.

To answer the telephone

Press the switch on the steering wheel or select

To refuse a call

Press the switch on the steering wheel or select.

To adjust the incoming call volume

Press the “+” or “-” button on “VOL”. You can also adjust the volume using the steering switches.

International calls

Received international calls may not be displayed correctly depending on the cellular phone in use.

Speaking on the telephone

The following screen is displayed when speaking on the telephone.

To adjust the call volume

Select “-” or “+”. You can also adjust the volume using the steering switches or the volume knob.

To prevent the other party from hearing your voice

Select "Mute".

Inputting tones

When using telephone services such as an answering service or a bank, you can store telephone numbers and code numbers in the contact.

1 Select "0-9".
2 Input the number.

■ Release Tones

"Release tones" appear when a continuous tone signal(s) containing a (w) is registered in the contact list.

Select "Release tones".

Release tones

A continuous tone signal is a character string that consists of numbers and the characters p or w. (e.g.056133w0123p#1*)
- When the “p” pause tone is used, the tone data up until the next pause tone will be automatically sent after 2 seconds have elapsed. When the “w” pause tone is used, the tone data up until the next pause tone will be automatically sent after a user operation is performed.
- Release tones can be used when automated operation of a telephone based service such as an answering machine or bank telephone service is desired. A telephone number with continuous tone signals can be registered in the contact list.

To transfer a call

Select "Handset mode" to on from a hands-free call to a cellular phone call.

Select "Handset mode" to off from a cellular phone call to a hands-free call.

Transmit volume setting

1 Select "Transmit volume".
2 Select the desired level for the transmit volume.
3 Select "OK".

To hang up

Press the switch on the steering wheel or select.

Call waiting

When a call is interrupted by a third party while talking, an incoming call message will be displayed.

To talk with the other party:

• Press the 📞 switch on the steering wheel.
• Select .

To refuse the call:

• Press the switch on the steering wheel.
• Select .

Every time you press the switch on the steering wheel or select during call waiting, you will be switched to the other party.

■Transferring calls

• If you transfer from the cellular phone to hands-free, the hands-free screen will be displayed, and you can operate the system using the screen.
  ●Transfer method and operation may vary according to the cellular phone used.
• For operation of the cellular phone in use, see the telephone's manual.

■Call waiting operation

Call waiting operation may differ depending on your telephone company and cellular phone.

Bluetooth® phone message function

Received messages can be forwarded from the connected Bluetooth® phone, enabling checking and replying using the audio system.

Depending on the type of Bluetooth® phone connected, received messages may not be transferred to the message inbox.

If the telephone does not support the message function, this function cannot be used.

Displaying message inbox screen.

1 Press the "button.
2 Select .

Receiving a message

When an e-mail/SMS/MMS is received, the incoming message screen pops up with sound and is ready to be operated on the screen.

① Select to check the message.
② Select to refuse the message.
③ Select to call the message sender.

AU3022BICFOM

■Receiving a message

● Depending on the cellular phone used for receiving messages, or its registration status with the system, some information may not be displayed.
●The pop up screen is separately available for incoming e-mail and SMS/MMS messages under the following conditions:

E-mail:

• "Incoming e-mail display" is set to "Full screen". (→P. 309)
• "E-mail notification popup" is set to on. (→P. 309)

SMS/MMS:

• "Incoming SMS/MMS display" is set to "Full screen". (→P. 309)
• "SMS/MMS notification popup" is set to on. (→P. 309)

Checking the messages

1 Display the message inbox screen. (→P. 295)
2 Select the desired message from the list.
3 Check that the message is displayed.

① E-mails: Select “Mark unread” or “Mark read” to mark mail unread or read on the message inbox screen.

This function is available when "Update message read status on telephone" is set to on ( P.309)

② Select to make a call to the sender.
③ Select to display the previous or next message.
④ Select to reply the message.

Check the messages

• Depending on the type of Bluetooth ^ phone being connected, it may be necessary to perform additional steps on the telephone.
• Messages are displayed in the appropriate connected Bluetooth ^ phone's registered mail address folder.
  Select the tab of the desired folder to be displayed.

- Only received messages on the connected Bluetooth ^ phone can be displayed.

●The text of the message is not displayed while driving.

Replying to a message

1 Display the message inbox screen. (→P. 295)
2 Select the desired message from the list.
3 Select "Quick message".
4 Select the desired message.
5 Select "Send".

■ Editing quick reply message

1 Select "Quick message".
2 Select corresponding to the desired message to edit.
3 Select "OK" when editing is completed.

Calling the message sender

Calls can be made to an e-mail/SMS/MMS message sender's telephone number.

1 Display the message inbox screen. (→P. 295)
2 Select the desired message.
3 Select.
4 Check that the "Call" screen is displayed.

- Calling from a number within a message

Calls can be made to a number identified in a message's text area.

1 Display the message inbox screen. ( P. 295)
2 Select the desired message.
3 Select the text area.
4 Select corresponding to the desired number.
5 Check that the "Call" screen is displayed.

- Calling from the incoming message screen

→P.293

Using the steering wheel switches

The steering wheel switches can be used to operate a connected cellular phone.

Operating a telephone using the steering wheel switches

① Volume switch

• Increase/Decrease the volume
• Press and hold: Continuously increase/ decrease the volume

② Off hook switch

• Make a call
• Receive a call
• Display "Telephone" screen

③ On hook switch

• End a call
• Refuse a call

④ Talk switch

A message will be displayed.

Bluetooth® phone settings

You can adjust the hands-free system to your desired settings.

"Telephone/message settings" screen

To display the screen shown below, press the “SETUP” button, and select “Telephone” on the “Setup” screen.

① Connect telephone ( P. 275)
② Sound settings ( P. 301)
③ Contact/call history settings ( P. 302)
④ Messaging settings ( P. 309)
⑤ Telephone display settings ( P. 310)

Sound setting

1 Display the "Telephone/message settings" screen. (→P. 300)
2 Select "Sound settings" on the "Telephone/message settings" screen.

① Set the desired ringtone.
② Adjust the ringtone volume.
③ Adjust the message readout volume.
④ Set the desired incoming SMS/MMS tone.
⑤ Adjust the incoming SMS/MMS tone volume.
⑥ Set the incoming e-mail tone.
⑦ Adjust the incoming e-mail tone volume.
⑧ Adjust the default volume of the other party's voice.
⑨ Reset all setup items

Contact/Call history settings

The contact can be transferred from a Bluetooth ^® phone to the system. The contact also can be added, edited and deleted.

The call history can be deleted and contact and favorites can be changed.

1 Display the "Telephone/message settings" screen. (→P. 300)
2 Select "Contact/call history settings".
3 Select the desired item to be set.

① For PBAP compatible Bluetooth® phones, select to set automatic contact/history transfer on/off. When set to on, the telephone's contact data and history are automatically transferred.
② Select to update contacts from the connected telephone. (→P. 303)
③ Select to sort contacts by the first name or last name field.
④ Select to add contacts to the favorites list. (→P. 306)
⑤ Select to delete contacts from the favorites list. (→P. 308)
⑥ Select to set the transferred contact image display on/off.
⑦ Select to clear contacts from the call history.*
⑧ Select to add new contacts to the contact list.* (→P. 304)
⑨ Select to edit contacts in the contact list.* (→P. 305)
⑩ Select to delete contacts from the contact list.* (→P. 306)
⑪ Select to reset all setup items.*

*: For PBAP compatible Bluetooth® phones only, this function is available when “Automatic contact/history transfer” is set to off.

Update contacts from telephone

Operation methods differ between PBAP compatible and PBAP incompatible but OPP compatible Bluetooth ^® phones.

If your cellular phone is neither PBAP nor OPP compatible, the contacts cannot be transferred.

For PBAP Compatible Bluetooth® Phones

1 Select "Update contacts from telephone".
2 Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the operation is complete.

This operation may be unnecessary depending on the type of cellular phone.

Depending on the type of cellular phone, OBEX authentication may be required when transferring contact data. Enter “1234” into the Bluetooth® phone.

If another Bluetooth ^® device is connected when transferring contact data, depending on the telephone, the connected Bluetooth ^® device may need to be disconnected.

Depending on the type of Bluetooth ^® phone being connected, it may be necessary to perform additional steps on the telephone.

For PBAP Incompatible but OPP compatible Bluetooth® Phones

1 Select "Update contacts from telephone".
2 Transfer the contact data to the system using a Bluetooth® phone.
This operation may be unnecessary depending on the type of cellular phone.
Depending on the type of cellular phone, OBEX authentication may be required when transferring contact data. Enter “1234” into the Bluetooth® phone.

To cancel this function, select "Cancel".

3 Select "Done" when it appears on the screen.
4 Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the operation is complete.

- Updating the contacts in a different way (From the “Call history” screen)

For PBAP compatible Bluetooth ^® phones, this function is available when “Automatic contact/history transfer” is set to off. (→P. 302)

1 Display the telephone top screen. ( P. 283)
2 Select the "Call history" tab and select a contact not yet registered in the contact list.
3 Select "Update contact".
4 Select the desired contact.
5 Select a telephone type for the telephone number.

Registering a new contact to the contact list

New contact data can be registered. Up to 4 numbers per person can be registered. For PBAP compatible Bluetooth® phones, this function is available when “Automatic contact/history transfer” is set to off. (→P. 302)

1 Select "New contact".
2 Enter the name and select "OK".
3 Enter the telephone number and select "OK".
4 Select the telephone type for the telephone number.
5 To add another number to this contact, select "Yes".

- Registering a new contact in a different way (From the “Call history” screen)

1 Display the telephone top screen. ( P. 283)
2 Select the "Call history" tab and select a contact not yet registered in the contact list.
3 Select "Add to contacts".
4 Follow the steps in "Registering a new contact to the contact list" from "STEP 3".

Editing the contact data

For PBAP compatible Bluetooth ^® phones, this function is available when “Automatic contact/history transfer” is set to off. (→P. 302)

1 Select "Edit contact".
2 Select the desired contact.
3 Select Corresponding to the desired name or number.
4 Follow the steps in “Registering a new contact to the contact list” from “STEP 4”. (→P. 304)

- Editing the contacts in a different way (From the “Contact details” screen)

1 Display the telephone top screen. ( P. 283)
2 Select the “Contacts”, “Call history” tab or the “Favorites” tab and select the desired contact.
3 Select "Edit contact".
"E-mail addresses": Select to display all registered e-mail addresses for the contact.
4 Follow the steps in "Registering a new contact to the contact list" from "STEP 4". (→P. 304)

Deleting the contact data

For PBAP compatible Bluetooth ^® phones, this function is available when “Automatic contact/history transfer” is set to off. (→P. 302)

1 Select "Delete contacts".
2 Select the desired contact and select "Delete".
3 Select "Yes" when the confirmation screen appears.

- Deleting the contact in a different way (From the “Contact details” screen)

1 Display the telephone top screen. ( P. 283)
2 Select the “Contacts”, “Call history” tab or the “Favorites” tab and select the desired contact.
3 Select "Edit contact".
4 Select "Yes" when the confirmation screen appears.

Favorites list setting

Up to 15 contacts (maximum of 4 numbers per contact) can be registered in the favorites list.

■ Registering the contacts in the favorites list

1 Select "Add favorite".
2 Select the desired contact to add to the favorites list.
Dimmed contacts are already stored as a favorite.
3 Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the operation is complete.

- When 15 contacts have already been registered to the favorites list

1 When 15 contacts have already been registered to the favorites list, a registered contact needs to be replaced.

Select "Yes" when the confirmation screen appears to replace a contact.

2 Select the contact to be replaced.

3 Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the operation is complete.

Registering contacts in the favorites list in a different way (from the “Contacts” screen)

1 Display the telephone top screen. ( P. 283)

2 Select the "Contacts" tab.

3 Select at the beginning of the desired contact list name to be registered in the favorites list.

When selected, is changed to , and the contact is registered in the favorites list.

Registering contacts in the favorites list in a different way (from the “Contact details” screen)

1 Display the telephone top screen. ( P. 283)

2 Select the “Contacts” tab or the “Call history” tab and select the desired contact.

3 Select "Add favorite".

4 Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the operation is complete.

■ Deleting the contacts in the favorites list

1 Select "Remove favorite".
2 Select the desired contacts and select "Remove".
3 Select "Yes" when the confirmation screen appears.
4 Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the operation is complete.
▶ Deleting contacts in the favorites list in a different way (from the "Contacts" screen)

1 Display the telephone top screen. ( P. 283)

2 Select the "Contacts" tab.

3 Select ★ at the beginning of the contact list name to be deleted from the favorites. list.

When selected, ★ changed to , and the data is deleted from the list.

- Deleting contacts in the favorites list in a different way (from the "Contact details" screen)

1 Display the telephone top screen. ( P. 283)
2 Select the “Contacts”, “Call history” tab or the “Favorites” tab and select the desired contact to delete.

3 Select "Remove favorite".

4 Select "Yes" when the confirmation screen appears.

5 Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the operation is complete.

Message settings

1 Display the "Telephone/message settings" screen. (→P. 300)
2 Select "Messaging settings".
3 Select the desired item to be set.

① Set automatic message transfer on/off.
② Set automatic message read out on/off.
③ Set the SMS/MMS notification popup on/off.
④ Set the e-mail notification popup on/off.
⑤ Set adding the vehicle signature to outgoing messages on/off.

⑥ Set updating message read status on telephone on/off.

⑦ Change the incoming SMS/MMS display.

"Full screen": When an SMS/MMS message is received, the incoming SMS/MMS display screen is displayed and can be operated on the screen.

"Drop-down": When an SMS/MMS message is received, a message is displayed on the upper side of the screen.

⑧ Change the incoming e-mail display.

"Full screen": When an e-mail is received, the incoming e-mail display screen is the displayed and can be operated on the screen.

"Drop-down": When an e-mail is received, a message is displayed on the upper side of the screen.

⑨ Set display of messaging account names on the inbox tab on/off. When set to on, messaging account names used on the cellular phone will be displayed.

⑩ Reset all setup items.

■ Displaying the “Messaging settings” screen in a different way

1 Display the telephone top screen. (→P. 283)
2 Select .
3 Select "Settings".
4 Select "Messaging settings".

Telephone display settings

1 Display the "Telephone/message settings" screen. (→P. 300)
2 Select "Telephone display settings".
3 Select the desired item to be set.

① Change the incoming call display.

"Full screen": When a call is received, the hands-free screen is displayed and can be operated on the screen.

"Drop-down": A message is displayed on the upper side of the screen.

② Set display of the contact/history transfer completion message on/off.
③ Reset all setup items.

What to do if... (Troubleshooting)

If there is a problem with the hands-free system or a Bluetooth ^® device, first check the table below.

When using the hands-free system with a Bluetooth® device

The hands-free system or Bluetooth ^® device does not work.

The Bluetooth version of the connected cellular phone may be older than the specified version.

→ Use a cellular phone with Bluetooth version 2.0 or higher (recommended: Ver. 3.0 with EDR or higher). (→P. 317)

▶ When registering/connecting a cellular phone

A cellular phone cannot be registered.

An incorrect passcode was entered on the cellular phone.→ Enter the correct passcode on the cellular phone.

The registration operation has not been completed on the cellular phone side.→ Complete the registration operation on the cellular phone (approve registration on the telephone).

Old registration information remains on either this system or the cellular phone.→ Delete the existing registration information from both this system and the cellular phone, then register the cellular phone you wish to connect to this system. (→P. 274)

A Bluetooth® connection cannot be made.

Another Bluetooth® device is already connected.→ Manually connect the cellular phone you wish to use to this sys-tem. (→P. 276)

Bluetooth® function is not enabled on the cellular phone.→ Enable the Bluetooth® function on the cellular phone.

“Please check your device settings.” message is displayed.

Bluetooth® function is not enabled on the cellular phone.→ Enable the Bluetooth® function on the cellular phone.

Old registration information remains on either this system or the cellular phone.→ Delete the existing registration information from both this system and the cellular phone, then register the cellular phone you wish to connect to this system. (→P. 274)

▶ When making/receiving a call

A call cannot be made/received.

Your vehicle is in a “Out of cellular service area. Please try again later.” area.→Move to where “Out of cellular service area. Please try again later.” no longer appears on the display.

▶ When using the phonebook

Phonebook data cannot be transferred manually/automatically.

Automatic phonebook transfer function on this system is set to off.→ Set automatic phonebook transfer function on this system to on.(→P. 302)

Passcode has not been entered on the cellular phone.→ Enter the passcode on the cellular phone if requested (default passcode: 1234).

Transfer operation on the cellular phone has not completed.→ Complete transfer operation on the cellular phone (approve transfer operation on the telephone).

Phonebook data cannot be edited.

Automatic phonebook transfer function on this system is set to on.→ Set automatic phonebook transfer function on this system to off.(→P. 302)

When using the Bluetooth® message function

Messages cannot be viewed.

Message transfer is not enabled on the cellular phone.→ Enable message transfer on the cellular phone (approve message transfer on the telephone).

Automatic transfer function on this system is set to off.→ Set automatic transfer function on this system to on. (→P. 309)

New message notifications are not displayed.

Notification of SMS/MMS/E-mail reception on this system is set to off.→ Set notification of SMS/MMS/E-mail reception on this system to on. (→P. 309)

Automatic message transfer function is not enabled on the cellular phone.→ Enable automatic transfer function on the cellular phone.

▶ In other situations

Even though all conceivable measures have been taken, the symptom status does not change.

The cellular phone is not close enough to this system.→ Bring the cellular phone closer to this system.

The cellular phone is the most likely cause of the symptom.→ Turn the cellular phone off, remove and reinstall the battery pack, and then restart the cellular phone.→ Enable the cellular phone’s Bluetooth® connection.→ Stop the cellular phone’s security software and close all applications.→ Before using an application installed on the cellular phone, carefully check its source and how its operation might affect this system.

Bluetooth®

■When using the Bluetooth® audio system

- In the following conditions, the system may not function.

• If the portable audio player is turned off
• If the portable audio player is not connected

• If the portable audio player's battery is low

• There may be a delay if a cellular phone connection is made during Bluetooth® audio play.
  ● Depending on the type of portable audio player that is connected to the system, operation may differ slightly and certain functions may not be available.

■When using the hands-free system

●The audio system is muted when making a call.
- If both parties speak at the same time, it may be difficult to hear.
- If the received call volume is overly loud, an echo may be heard. If the Bluetooth® phone is too close to the system, quality of the sound may deteriorate and connection status may deteriorate.
- In the following circumstances, it may be difficult to hear the other party:

• When driving on unpaved roads
• When driving at high speeds
• If a window or roof is open
• If the air conditioning is blowing directly on the microphone
• If there is interference from the network of the cellular phone

Conditions under which the system will not operate

• If using a cellular phone that does not support Bluetooth®
• If the cellular phone is turned off
• If you are outside of cellular phone service coverage

If the cellular phone is not connected

If the cellular phone's battery is low

When outgoing calls are controlled, due to heavy traffic on telephone lines, etc.

• When the cellular phone itself cannot be used
• When transferring contact data from the cellular phone

Bluetooth® antenna

The antenna is built into the display.

If the portable audio player is behind the seat or in the glove box or console box, or is touching or covered by metal objects, the connection status may deteriorate.

If the cellular phone is behind the seat or in the console box, or touching or covered by metal objects, the connection status may deteriorate.

■Battery charge/signal status

●This display may not correspond exactly with the portable audio player or cellular phone itself.
●This system does not have a charging function.
- The portable audio player or cellular phone battery will be depleted quickly when the device is connected to Bluetooth®.

When using the Bluetooth ^® audio and hands-free system at the same time

The following problems may occur.

• The Bluetooth ^ audio connection may be interrupted.
• Noise may be heard during Bluetooth® audio playback.

■About the contact in this system

The following data is stored for every registered cellular phone. When another telephone is connecting, you cannot read the registered data.

• Contact data
• Call history
  ●Favorite
  Message

When removing a Bluetooth ^® phone from the system, the above-mentioned data is also deleted.

About Bluetooth®

Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

■Compatible models

The Bluetooth ^® audio system supports portable audio players with the following specifications

- Bluetooth® specifications:

Ver. 2.0, or higher (Recommended: Ver. 3.0+EDR or higher)

Profiles:

- A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) Ver. 1.0, or higher (Recommended: Ver. 1.2 or higher)

This is a profile to transmit stereo audio or high quality sound to the audio system.

- AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (Recommended: Ver. 1.4 or higher)

This is a profile to allow remote control the A/V equipment.

However, please note that some functions may be limited depending on the type of portable audio player connected.

The hands-free system supports cellular phones with the following specifications.

- Bluetooth® specification:

Ver. 2.0 or higher (Recommended: Ver. 3.0+EDR or higher)

Profiles:

- HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (Recommended: Ver. 1.6 or higher)

This is a profile to allow hands-free phone calls using a cellular phone or head set. It has outgoing and incoming call functions.

• OPP (Object Push Profile) Ver. 1.1 or higher (Recommended: Ver. 1.2) This is a profile to transfer Contact data. When a Bluetooth® compatible cellular phone has both PBAP and OPP, OPP cannot be used.
• PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (Recommended: Ver. 1.1)

This is a profile to transfer contact data.

• MAP (Message Access Profile) Ver.1.0 or higher

This is a profile to using phone message.

If the cellular phone does not support HFP, you cannot register it with the hands-free system. OPP, PBAP or MAP services must be selected individually.

■Reconnecting the portable audio player

If the portable audio player is disconnected due to poor reception when the power switch is in the ACCESSORY or ON mode, the system automatically reconnects the portable audio player.

If you have switched off the portable audio player yourself, follow the instructions below to reconnect:

• Select the portable audio player again
  ●Enter the portable audio player

■When you sell your car

Be sure to delete your personal data. ( P. 236)

WARNING

■While driving

Do not use the portable audio player, cellular phone or connect a device to the Bluetooth® system.

■ Caution regarding interference with electronic devices

• Your audio unit is fitted with Bluetooth® antennas. People with implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should maintain a reasonable distance between themselves and the Bluetooth® antennas. The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices.
  Before using Bluetooth® devices, users of any electrical medical device other than implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation under the influence of radio waves. Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical devices.

NOTICE

■When leaving the vehicle

Do not leave your portable audio player or cellular phone in the vehicle. The inside of the vehicle may become hot, causing damage to the portable audio player or cellular phone.

Not for Reproduction

6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Automatic air conditioning system......322

6-2. Using the interior lights

Interior lights list......330

• Interior lights......331
  • Vanity lights......331
  • Personal lights......332

6-3. Using the storage features

List of storage features......334

• Glove box ....335
• Console box ....335
• Bottle holders ....336
  • Cup holders......337
  • Auxiliary boxes .....338

Luggage compartment features....339

6-4. Other interior features

Other interior features.....343

• Sun visors......343
• Vanity mirrors .....343
- Clock 344
• Power outlets......345
- Armrest......346
- Assist grips......346

Automatic air conditioning system

Air outlets are automatically selected and fan speed is automatically adjusted according to the set temperature setting.

Air conditioning controls

■ Adjusting the temperature setting

① Increases the temperature
② Decreases the temperature

■ Fan speed setting

① Increases the fan speed
② Decreases the fan speed

■ Change the airflow mode

To change the airflow mode, move the airflow change knob upward or downward.

The air outlets used are changed each time the knob is operated.

① Air flows to the upper body.
② Air flows to the upper body and feet.
③ Air flows to the feet.
④ Air flows to the feet and the windshield defogger operates.

Using automatic mode

1 Press AUTO.
The dehumidification function begins to operate. Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting.
2 Adjust the temperature setting.
3 To stop the operation, press . #OFF

■ Automatic mode indicator

If the fan speed setting or air flow modes are operated, the automatic mode indicator goes off. However, automatic mode for functions other than that operated is maintained.

■ Adjusting the temperature for driver and passenger seats separately

To turn on the dual control mode, perform any of the following procedures:

●Press ○ DUAL
- Adjust the passenger's side temperature setting. The indicator comes on when the dual control mode is on.

Other functions

■ Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes

Press to change to recirculated air mode.

Press to change to outside air mode.

When recirculated air mode is selected, the indicator on illuminates.

When outside air mode is selected, the indicator on illuminates.

■ Defogging the windshield

Defoggers are used to defog the windshield and front side windows.

Press FRONT.

The dehumidification function operates and fan speed increases.

Set the outside/recirculated air mode button to the outside air mode if the recirculated air mode is used. (It may switch automatically.)

To defog the windshield and the front side windows early, turn the air flow and temperature up.

To return to the previous mode, press again when the windshield is defogged.

■ Defogging the rear window

Defoggers are used to defog the rear window.

Press REAR

The defoggers will automatically turn off after a period of time.

Air outlets

■ Location of air outlets

The air outlets and air volume change according to the selected airflow mode. (→P. 323)

Interior view of a car showing the steering wheel, dashboard, and seat area (no text or symbols visible)

■ Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets

▶ Front center outlets

① Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down.
② Turn the knob up to open the vent and down to close the vent.

Front side outlets

Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down.

Diagram of a car wheel with four directional arrows, no text or symbols present

① Open the vent
② Close the vent

Operation of the air conditioning system in Eco drive mode

In Eco drive mode, the air conditioning system is controlled as follows to prioritize fuel efficiency:

● Engine speed and compressor operation controlled to restrict heating/cooling capacity
● Fan speed restricted when automatic mode is selected

To improve air conditioning performance, perform the following operations:

• Adjust the fan speed
• Adjust the temperature setting
  ●Turn off Eco drive mode

■ Using automatic mode

Fan speed is adjusted automatically according to the temperature setting and the ambient conditions.

Therefore, the fan may stop for a while until warm or cool air is ready to flow immediately after is pressed.

■ Fogging up of the windows

●The windows will easily fog up when the humidity in the vehicle is high.
Turning on will dehumidify the air from the outlets and defog the wind-shield effectively.

If you turn off, the windows may fog up more easily.

The windows may fog up if the recirculated air mode is used.

■Outside/recirculated air mode

• When driving on dusty roads such as tunnels or in heavy traffic, set the outside/recirculated air mode button to the recirculated air mode. This is effective in preventing outside air from entering the vehicle interior. During cooling operation, setting the recirculated air mode will also cool the vehicle interior effectively.
  ● Outside/recirculated air mode may automatically switch depending on the temperature setting or the inside temperature.

■When the outside temperature is low

The dehumidification function may not operate even when is pressed.

■Ventilation and air conditioning odors

● To let fresh air in, set the air conditioning system to the outside air mode.
During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter into and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause odor to be emitted from the vents.
●To reduce potential odors from occurring:
- It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air mode prior to turning the vehicle off.
- The start timing of the blower may be delayed for a short period of time immediately after the air conditioning system is started in automatic mode.

Air conditioning filter

→P. 379

Customization

Settings (e.g. air conditioning setting) can be changed.

(Customizable features → P. 457)

WARNING

■To prevent the windshield from fogging up

- Do not use during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield can cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your vision.

- Do not place anything on the instrument panel which may cover the air outlets. Otherwise, air flow may be obstructed, preventing the windshield defoggers from defogging.

NOTICE

■To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the hybrid system is stopped.

Interior lights list

① Rear personal light ( P. 332)
② Vanity lights ( P. 331)
③ Front interior/front personal lights ( P. 331, 332)
④ Power switch light

Interior lights

Front

① Door position on
② Off

Vanity lights

① On
② Off

Personal lights

Front

On/off

When the lights are on due to the door link switch, a light will not turn off even if its lens is pressed.

Rear

On/off

When the front interior lights are on due to the door link switch, a light will not turn off even if its lens is pressed.

Diagram of a rectangular device with internal grid pattern and two pink arrows pointing to its sides (no text or symbols)

■Illuminated entry system

When the interior light switch is in the door position, the interior lights and power switch light automatically turn on/off according to power switch mode, the presence of the electronic key, whether the doors are locked/unlocked and whether the doors are open/closed.

■To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

The following lights will turn off automatically after 20 minutes:

● Personal/interior lights
●Luggage compartment light
● Vanity lights

Customization

Settings (e.g. the time elapsed before lights turn off) can be changed. (Customizable features: →P. 457)

NOTICE

■To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the hybrid system is off.

List of storage features

① Bottle holders ( P. 336)
② Glove box ( P. 335)
③ Auxiliary boxes (→P. 338)

④ Cup holders ( P. 337)
⑤ Console box (→P. 335)

WARNING

- Do not leave glasses, lighters or spray cans in the storage spaces, as this may cause the following when cabin temperature becomes high:

• Glasses may be deformed by heat or cracked if they come into contact with other stored items.

• Lighters or spray cans may explode. If they come into contact with other stored items, the lighter may catch fire or the spray can may release gas, causing a fire hazard.

- When driving or when the storage compartments are not in use, keep the lids closed.

In the event of sudden braking or sudden swerving, an accident may occur due to an occupant being struck by an open lid or the items stored inside.

Glove box

Pull up the lever to open the glove box.

The glove box light turns on when the tail lights are on.

Console box

Console box

Lift the lid while pulling up the knob on the right seat side.

▶ Upper level box

Lift the lid while pulling up the knob on the left seat side.

Bottle holders

Front

Line drawing of a car interior showing steering wheel and dashboard (no text or symbols)

Rear

Technical line drawing of a car interior showing hand positioning and seat area (no text or symbols)

• When storing a bottle, close the cap.
  ●The bottle may not be stored depending on its size or shape.

WARNING

Do not place anything other than a bottle in the bottle holders.

Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or sudden braking and cause injury.

Cup holders

Front

Diagram of a car gear shift lever and wheel assembly (no text or symbols)

Rear

Line drawing of a car's side armrest with two circular compartments and a seatbelt (no text or symbols)

●The insert for the front cup holders can be removed for cleaning.

Diagram of a car interior with a highlighted vehicle component and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

● The front cup holders can be adjusted to the appropriate size for a cup or drink can by changing the insert position.

WARNING

Do not place anything other than cups or aluminum cans in the cup holders. Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or sudden braking, causing injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent burns.

Auxiliary boxes

▶ Type A
▶ Type B

Interior view of a car air intake console with mode shift and battery (no text or symbols)

Push the lid to open. Pull the tab to open.

WARNING

• Keep the auxiliary boxes closed. In the event of sudden braking, an accident may occur due to an occupant being struck by an open auxiliary box or the items stored inside.
  ●Type A only: Do not store items heavier than 0.2 kg (0.4 lb.). Doing so may cause the auxiliary box to open and the items inside may fall out, resulting in an accident.

Luggage compartment features

Cargo hooks

Cargo hooks are provided for securing loose items.

WARNING

To avoid injury, always return the cargo hooks to their positions when they are not in use.

Grocery bag hooks

Top-down line drawing of a car backrest with internal compartments and a highlighted seat (no text or symbols)

NOTICE

Do not hang any object heavier than 4 kg (8.8 lb.) on the grocery bag hook.

Auxiliary boxes

Lift the deck mat tab and pull it toward you to remove it.

Technical line drawing of a car's rear window frame structure (no text or symbols)

Removing the luggage cover

① Unhook the cords.
② Remove the cover from the anchors.

The cover can be removed by pulling it in the direction of the arrow labeled "A".

If this does not work, pull the cover in the direction labeled "B".

The luggage cover can be stowed on the back of the rear seats.

① Insert one side of the luggage cover into the gap between the back of the rear seat and deck side trim.
② While moving the luggage cover toward the back of the rear seat, insert the other side of the luggage cover.

Make sure that the luggage cover is securely installed.

When removing the luggage cover, reverse the steps listed.

NOTICE

Do not apply a strong impact to the stored luggage cover. Doing so may damage the luggage cover.

Other interior features

Sun visors

① To set the visor in the forward position, flip it down.
② To set the visor in the side position, flip down, unhook, and swing it to the side.

Vanity mirrors

Slide the cover to open.

Clock

The clock can be adjusted by pressing the buttons.

① Adjusts the hours
② Adjusts the minutes
③ Rounds to the nearest hour*

*: e.g.1:00 to 1:29 → 1:00

1:30 to 1:59 → 2:00

●The clock is displayed when the power switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode.
- When the 12-volt battery terminals are disconnected and reconnected, the clock will automatically be set to 1:00.

Power outlets

Please use as a power supply for electronic goods that use less than 12 VDC/10 A (power consumption of 120 W). When using electronic goods, make sure that the power consumption of all the connected power outlets is less than 120 W.

Front

▶ Rear

Open the cover. Open the cover.

The power outlets can be used when the power switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode.

NOTICE

●To avoid damaging the power outlets, close the power outlet covers when the power outlets are not in use.
Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlets may cause a short circuit.
● To prevent 12-volt battery discharge, do not use the power outlets longer than necessary when the hybrid system is off.

Armrest

Fold down the armrest for use.

Diagram showing car seatbelt insertion into a vehicle's side panel, with no text or symbols present.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the armrest, do not apply too much load on the arm-rest.

Assist grips

An assist grip installed on the ceiling can be used to support your body while sitting on the seat.

Line drawing of a car interior showing dashboard, seats, and driver's seat (no text or symbols)

WARNING

Do not use the assist grip when getting in or out of the vehicle or rising from your seat.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the assist grip, do not hang any heavy object or put a heavy load on the assist grip.

Maintenance and care

7

7-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior ......348

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior ....351

7-2. Maintenance

Maintenance requirements....354

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Do-it-yourself service precautions....356

Hood....358

Positioning a floor jack ....360

Engine compartment......361

12-volt battery......368

Tires....372

Tire inflation pressure......375

Wheels....377

Air conditioning filter .....379

Electronic key battery .....381

Checking and replacing fuses....383

Light bulbs ....387

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior

Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in prime condition:

• Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any dirt and dust.
  ●Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a chamois.
• For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thoroughly with water.
  ●Wipe away any water.
  ●Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates.

If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle body is cool.

■Automatic car washes

• Fold the mirrors before washing the vehicle. Start washing from the front of the vehicle. Make sure to extend the mirrors before driving.
• Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface and harm your vehicle's paint.

■ High pressure car washes

• Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity of the windows.
  Before using the car wash, check that the fuel filler door on your vehicle is closed properly.

■When using a car wash

If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the effective range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In that case, follow the following correction procedures to wash the vehicle:

• Place the key in a position 2 m (6 ft.) or more separate from the vehicle while the vehicle is being washed. (Take care to ensure that the key is not stolen.)
• Set the electronic key to battery-saving mode to disable the smart entry & start system. (→P. 112)

Aluminum wheels

• Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent. Do not use hard brushes or abrasive cleaners. Do not use strong or harsh chemical cleaners.
  Use the same mild detergent and wax as used on the paint.
• Do not use detergent on the wheels when they are hot, for example after driving for long distance in the hot weather.
• Wash detergent from the wheels immediately after use.

Bumpers

Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.

WARNING

■When washing the vehicle

Do not apply water to the inside of the engine compartment. Doing so may cause the electrical components etc. to catch fire.

■Precautions regarding the exhaust pipe

Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust pipe to become quite hot.

When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the exhaust pipe until it has cooled sufficiently, as touching a hot exhaust pipe can cause burns.

NOTICE

To prevent paint deterioration and corrosion on the body and components (aluminum wheels etc.)

●Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases:

• After driving near the sea coast
• After driving on salted roads
- If coal tar or tree sap is present on the paint surface
- If dead insects, insect droppings or bird droppings are present on the paint surface
• After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust, iron powder or chemical substances
- If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled with dust or mud
- If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface

- If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately.

● To prevent the wheels from corroding, remove any dirt and store in a place with low humidity when storing the wheels.

■Cleaning the exterior lights

●Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush. This may damage the surfaces of the lights.
- Do not apply wax to the surfaces of the lights. Wax may cause damage to the lenses.

■When using a high pressure car wash

Do not bring the nozzle tip close to boots (rubber or resin manufactured cover), connectors or the following parts. The parts may be damaged if they come into contact with high-pressure water.

• Traction related parts
• Steering parts
• Suspension parts
• Brake parts

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior

The following procedures will help protect your vehicle's interior and keep it in top condition:

Protecting the vehicle interior

• Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty surfaces with a cloth dampened with lukewarm water.
• If dirt cannot be removed, wipe it off with a soft cloth dampened with neutral detergent diluted to approximately 1%.
  Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off remaining traces of detergent and water.

Cleaning the leather areas

• Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.
• Wipe off any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened with diluted detergent.
  Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool detergent.
• Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off all remaining traces of detergent.
  ●Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining moisture. Allow the leather to dry in a shaded and ventilated area.

Cleaning the synthetic leather areas

• Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.
• Wipe it off with a soft cloth dampened with neutral detergent diluted to approximately 1%.
• Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off remaining traces of detergent and water.

Caring for leather areas

Toyota recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year to maintain the quality of the vehicle's interior.

■Shampooing the carpets

There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a sponge or brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not use water. Wipe dirty surfaces and let them dry. Excellent results are obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as possible.

Seat belts

Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also check the belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.

WARNING

Water in the vehicle

• Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehicle, such as on the floor, in the hybrid battery (traction battery) air vents, and in the luggage compartment. Doing so may cause the hybrid battery, electrical components, etc. to malfunction or catch fire.
• Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet. ( P. 35) An electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function properly, resulting in death or serious injury.

■Cleaning the interior (especially instrument panel)

Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel may reflect off the windshield, obstructing the driver's view and leading to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

■ Cleaning detergents

• Do not use the following types of detergent, as they may discolor the vehicle interior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces:
  • Non-seat portions: Organic substances such as benzene or gasoline, alkaline or acidic solutions, dye, and bleach
• Seats: Alkaline or acidic solutions, such as thinner, benzene, and alcohol
• Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel's or other interior part's painted surface may be damaged.

■ Preventing damage to leather surfaces

Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of leather surfaces:

• Remove any dust or dirt from leather surfaces immediately.
• Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time. Park the vehicle in the shade, especially during summer.
• Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or containing wax on the upholstery, as they may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior heats up significantly.

Water on the floor

Do not wash the vehicle floor with water.

Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes into contact with electrical components such as the audio system above or under the floor of the vehicle. Water may also cause the body to rust.

■ Cleaning the inside of the rear window

- Do not use glass cleaner to clean the rear window, as this may cause damage to the rear window defogger heater wires. Use a cloth dampened with lukewarm water to gently wipe the window clean. Wipe the window in strokes running parallel to the heater wires.

- Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires.

Maintenance requirements

To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular maintenance are essential. Toyota recommends the following maintenance:

Scheduled maintenance

Scheduled maintenance should be performed at specified intervals according to the maintenance schedule.

For full details of your maintenance schedule, refer to the “Warranty and Service Booklet”.

Do-it-yourself maintenance

What about do-it-yourself maintenance?

Many of the maintenance items are easy to do yourself if you have a little mechanical ability and a few basic automotive tools.

Note, however, that some maintenance tasks require special tools and skills. These are best performed by qualified technicians. Even if you are an experienced do-it-yourself mechanic, we recommend that repairs and maintenance be conducted by your Toyota dealer who will keep a record of maintenance on your vehicle. This record could be helpful should you ever require Warranty Service.

Where to go for maintenance service?

It makes good sense to take your vehicle to your local Toyota dealer for maintenance service as well as other inspections and repairs.

Toyota technicians are well-trained specialists receiving the latest service information through technical bulletins, service tips, and in-dealership training programs. They learn to work on Toyota before they work on your vehicle, rather than while they are working on it. Doesn't that seem like the best way?

Your Toyota dealer has invested a lot of money in special Toyota tools and service equipment. It helps them to do the job better and at less cost.

Your Toyota dealer's service department will perform all of the scheduled maintenance on your vehicle reliably and economically.

■ Does your vehicle need repairs?

Be on the alert for changes in performance and sounds, and visual tip-offs that indicate service is needed. Some important clues are:

●Engine missing, stumbling or pinging
● Appreciable loss of power
●Strange engine noises
● A fluid leak under the vehicle (However, water dripping from the air conditioning system after use is normal.)
- Change in exhaust sound (This may indicate a dangerous carbon monoxide leak. Drive with the windows open and have the exhaust system checked immediately.)
● Flat-looking tires, excessive tire squeal when cornering, uneven tire wear
● Vehicle pulls to one side when driven straight on a level road
●Strange noises related to suspension movement
- Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling brake pedal, pedal almost touches the floor, vehicle pulls to one side when braking
●Engine coolant temperature continually higher than normal

If you notice any of these clues, take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer as soon as possible. Your vehicle may need adjustment or repair.

WARNING

■If your vehicle is not properly maintained

Improper maintenance could result in serious damage to the vehicle and possible death or serious injury.

■Handling of the 12-volt battery

12-volt battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands after handling. ( P. 368)

Do-it-yourself service precautions

If you perform maintenance by yourself, be sure to follow the correct procedure as given in these sections.

Items Parts and tools
12-volt battery condition(→P. 368)	• Grease• Conventional wrench (for terminal clamp bolts)
Engine/power control unit coolant level(→P. 365)	• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or a similar high quality ethylene glycol-based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is pre-mixed with 50% coolant and 50% deionized water.• Funnel (used only for adding coolant)
Engine oil level(→P. 362)	• “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent• Rag or paper towel• Funnel (used only for adding engine oil)
Fuses (→P. 383)	• Fuse with same amperage rating as original
Light bulbs(→P. 387)	• Bulb with same number and wattage rating as original• Phillips-head screwdriver• Flathead screwdriver • Wrench
Radiator and condenser (→P. 366)	—
Tire inflation pressure (→P. 375)	• Tire pressure gauge• Compressed air source
Washer fluid(→P. 367)	• Water or washer fluid containing antifreeze (for winter use)• Funnel (used only for adding water or washer fluid)

WARNING

The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may move suddenly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death or serious injury, observe the following precautions.

■When working on the engine compartment

●Make sure that “Power On” on the multi-information display and the “READY” indicator are both off.
- Keep hands, clothing and tools away from the moving fan and engine drive belt.
- Be careful not to touch the engine, power control unit, radiator, exhaust manifold, etc. right after driving as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot.
- Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper and rags, in the engine compartment.
- Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel. Fuel fumes are flammable.
Take care because brake fluid can harm your hands or eyes and damage painted surfaces. If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with clean water immediately. If you still experience discomfort, consult a doctor.

■ When working near the electric cooling fans or radiator grille

Be sure the power switch is off.

With the power switch in ON mode, the electric cooling fans may automatically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the coolant temperature is high. (→P. 366)

Safety glasses

Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc. from getting in your eyes.

NOTICE

If you remove the air cleaner filter

Driving with the air cleaner filter removed may cause excessive engine wear due to dirt in the air.

If the fluid level is low or high

It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high.

If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it may indicate a serious problem.

Hood

Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood.

1 Pull the hood lock release lever. The hood will pop up slightly.

2 Pull up the auxiliary catch lever and lift the hood.

3 Hold the hood open by inserting the support rod into the slot.

WARNING

■Pre-driving check

Check that the hood is fully closed and locked.

If the hood is not locked properly, it may open while the vehicle is in motion and cause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.

■After installing the support rod into the slot

Make sure the rod supports the hood securely preventing it from falling down onto your head or body.

NOTICE

When closing the hood

Be sure to return the support rod to its clip before closing the hood. Closing the hood with the support rod not clipped could cause the hood to bend.

Positioning a floor jack

When using a floor jack, follow the instructions in the manual provided with the jack and perform the operation safely.

When raising your vehicle with a floor jack, position the jack correctly. Improper placement may damage your vehicle or cause injury.

Front

Technical line drawing of a car suspension system with mechanical components (no text or symbols)

Rear

Technical line drawing of a car's front suspension system with tool and bracket assembly (no text or symbols)

Engine compartment

① Engine coolant reservoir (→P. 365)
② Engine oil level dipstick (→P. 362)
③ Engine oil filler cap ( P. 363)
④ Power control unit coolant reservoir ( P. 365)

⑤ Fuse box ( P. 383)
⑥ Power control unit coolant radiator ( P. 366)
⑦ Radiator ( P. 366)
⑧ Condenser ( P. 366)
⑨ Electric cooling fans
⑩ Washer fluid tank ( P. 367)

Engine oil

With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil level on the dipstick.

- Checking the engine oil

1 Park the vehicle on level ground. After warming up the engine and turning off the hybrid system, wait more than 5 minutes for the oil to drain back into the bottom of the engine.

2 Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out.

Technical line drawing of a car engine compartment with an inset showing a highlighted component (no text or symbols present)

3 Wipe the dipstick clean.
4 Reinsert the dipstick fully.
5 Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check the oil level.

① Low
② Normal
③ Excessive

The shape of the dipstick may differ depending on the type of vehicle or engine.

6 Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully.

■ Adding engine oil

If the oil level is below or near the low level mark, add engine oil of the same type as that already in the engine.

Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed before adding oil.

Engine oil selection →P. 449
Oil quantity (Low → Full)	1.5 L (1.6 qt., 1.3 Imp. qt.)
Items Clean funnel

1 Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counterclockwise.
2 Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick.
3 Install the oil filler cap by turning it clockwise.

■Engine oil consumption

A certain amount of engine oil will be consumed while driving. In the following situations, oil consumption may increase, and engine oil may need to be refilled in between oil maintenance intervals.

• When the engine is new, for example directly after purchasing the vehicle or after replacing the engine
• If low quality oil or oil of an inappropriate viscosity is used
• When driving at high engine speeds or with a heavy load, or when driving while accelerating or decelerating frequently
  When leaving the engine idling for a long time, or when driving frequently through heavy traffic

WARNING

■Used engine oil

●Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may cause skin disorders such as inflammation and skin cancer, so care should be taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used engine oil from your skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water.
● Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do not dispose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the ground.
Call your Toyota dealer, service station or auto parts store for information concerning recycling or disposal.
●Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children.

NOTICE

■To prevent serious engine damage

Check the oil level on a regular basis.

■When replacing the engine oil

● Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components.
● Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged.
- Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle.
- Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly tightened.

Coolant

The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the "FULL" and "LOW" lines on the reservoir when the hybrid system is cold.

▶ Engine coolant reservoir

① Reservoir cap
② “FULL” line
③ “LOW” line

If the level is on or below the "LOW" line, add coolant up to the "FULL" line.

▶ Power control unit coolant reservoir

① Reservoir cap
② “FULL” line
③ “LOW” line

If the level is on or below the "LOW" line, add coolant up to the "FULL" line.

Coolant selection

Only use "Toyota Super Long Life Coolant" or a similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology.

"Toyota Super Long Life Coolant" is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized water. (Minimum temperature: -35°C [-31°F])

For more details about engine coolant, contact your Toyota dealer.

If the coolant level drops within a short time of replenishing

Visually check the radiators, hoses, engine/power control unit coolant reservoir caps, drain cock and water pump.

If you cannot find a leak, have your Toyota dealer test the cap and check for leaks in the cooling system.

WARNING

■When the hybrid system is hot

Do not remove the engine/power control unit coolant reservoir caps.

The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the cap is removed, causing serious injuries, such as burns.

NOTICE

When adding coolant

Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of water and antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion protection and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label.

If you spill coolant

Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent it from damaging parts or paint.

Radiators and condenser

Check the radiators and condenser and clear away any foreign objects.

If either of the above parts is extremely dirty or you are not sure of their condition, have your vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

WARNING

■When the hybrid system is hot

Do not touch the radiators or condenser as they may be hot and cause serious injuries, such as burns.

Washer fluid

If the fluid level is extremely low add washer fluid.

Raise the cap keeping your finger pressed down on the hole in the center and check the fluid level in the tube.

WARNING

■When adding washer fluid

Do not add washer fluid when the hybrid system is hot or operating as washer fluid contains alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the engine etc.

NOTICE

■Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid

Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid. Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle's painted surfaces.

Diluting washer fluid

Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary. Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the label of the washer fluid bottle.

12-volt battery

Location

The 12-volt battery is located in the right-hand side of luggage compartment.

Line drawing of a car interior showing engine compartment and rear door opening (no text or symbols)

■ Removing the 12-volt battery cover

1 Remove the deck mat.

Top-down line drawing of a car trunk with a highlighted internal space, no text or symbols present

2 Remove the 12-volt battery cover.

Diagram of a vehicle's front compartment with a highlighted arrow pointing to the interior (no text or symbols present)

■ Exterior

Make sure that the 12-volt battery terminals are not corroded and that there are no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps.

① Terminals
② Hold-down clamp

Before recharging

When recharging, the 12-volt battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Therefore, before recharging:

• If recharging with the 12-volt battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect the ground cable.
  ● Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and disconnecting the charger cables to the 12-volt battery.

■ After recharging/reconnecting the 12-volt battery

• Unlocking the doors using the entry function may not be possible immediately after reconnecting the 12-volt battery. If this happens, use the wireless remote control or the mechanical key to lock/unlock the doors.
• Start the hybrid system with the power switch in ACCESSORY mode. The hybrid system may not start with the power switch turned off. However, the hybrid system will operate normally from the second attempt.
  The power switch mode is recorded by the vehicle. If the 12-volt battery is reconnected, the vehicle will return the power switch mode to the status it was in before the 12-volt battery was disconnected. Make sure to turn the power switch off before disconnecting the 12-volt battery. Take extra care when connecting the 12-volt battery if the power switch mode prior to discharge is unknown.

When the 12-volt battery is reconnected, start the hybrid system, depress the brake pedal, and confirm that it is possible to shift into each shift position.

If the system will not start even after multiple attempts, contact your Toyota dealer.

WARNING

■Chemicals in the 12-volt battery

The 12-volt battery contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death or serious injury, take the following precautions while working on or near the 12-volt battery:

• Do not cause sparks by touching the 12-volt battery terminals with tools.
• Do not smoke or light a match near the 12-volt battery.
  ●Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes.
  ●Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.
  ●Wear protective safety glasses when working near the 12-volt battery.
• Keep children away from the 12-volt battery.

■Where to safely charge the 12-volt battery

Always charge the 12-volt battery in an open area. Do not charge the 12-volt battery in a garage or closed room where there is not sufficient ventilation.

■When disconnecting the 12-volt battery terminals

Always disconnect the negative (-) terminal first. If the positive (+) terminal is disconnected first and touches a surrounding metal surface it may cause sparks resulting in a fire or it may result in an electric shock, death or serious injury.

How to recharge the 12-volt battery

Only perform a slow charge (5 A or less). The 12-volt battery may explode if charged at a quicker rate.

WARNING

Emergency measures regarding electrolyte

●If electrolyte gets in your eyes
Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while traveling to the nearest medical facility.
●If electrolyte gets on your skin
Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or a burning sensation, seek medical attention immediately.
●If electrolyte gets on your clothes
It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the clothing and follow the procedure above if necessary.
●If you accidentally swallow electrolyte
Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Follow with milk of magnesia, beaten raw egg or vegetable oil. Get emergency medical attention immediately.

■When replacing the 12-volt battery

Use a 12-volt battery designed for this vehicle. Failure to do so may cause gas (hydrogen) to enter the passenger compartment, causing a fire or explosion.

For replacement of the 12-volt battery, contact your Toyota dealer.

NOTICE

■When recharging the 12-volt battery

Never recharge the 12-volt battery while the hybrid system is operating. Also, be sure all accessories are turned off.

Tires

Replace or rotate tires in accordance with maintenance schedules and treadwear.

Checking tires

Check if the treadwear indicators are showing on the tires. Also check the tires for uneven wear, such as excessive wear on one side of the tread.

Check the spare tire condition and pressure if not rotated.

① New tread
② Worn tread
③ Treadwear indicator

The location of treadwear indicators is shown by a "TWI" or "Δ" mark, etc., molded into the sidewall of each tire.

Replace the tires if the treadwear indicators are showing on a tire.

Tire rotation

Rotate the tires in the order shown.

To equalize tire wear and help extend tire life, Toyota recommends that tire rotation is carried out approximately every 10000 km (6000 miles).

graph TD
    A[" "] --> B[" "]
    C[" "] --> D[" "]
    E[" "] --> F[" "]
    G[" "] --> H[" "]
    I[" "] --> J[" "]
    K[" "] --> L[" "]
    M[" "] --> N[" "]
    O[" "] --> P[" "]
    Q[" "] --> R[" "]
    S[" "] --> T[" "]
    U[" "] --> V[" "]
    W[" "] --> X[" "]
    Y[" "] --> Z[" "]
    AA[" "] --> AB[" "]
    AC[" "] --> AD[" "]
    AE[" "] --> AF[" "]
    AG[" "] --> AH[" "]
    AI[" "] --> AJ[" "]
    AK[" "] --> AL[" "]
    AM[" "] --> AN[" "]
    AO[" "] --> AP[" "]
    AQ[" "] --> AR[" "]
    AS[" "] --> AT[" "]
    AU[" "] --> AV[" "]
    AW[" "] --> AX[" "]
    AY[" "] --> AZ[" "]
    BA[" "] --> BB[" "]
    BC[" "] --> BD[" "]
    BE[" "] --> BF[" "]
    BG[" "] --> BH[" "]
    BI[" "] --> BJ[" "]
    BK[" "] --> BL[" "]
    BM[" "] --> BN[" "]
    BO[" "] --> BP[" "]
    BP[" "] --> BQ[" "]
    BR[" "] --> BS[" "]
    BT[" "] --> BU[" "]
    BV[" "] --> BW[" "]
    BX[" "] --> BY[" "]
    BZ[" "] --> CA[" "]
    CB[" "] --> CD[" "]
    CE[" "] --> CF[" "]
    CG[" "] --> DH[" "]
    DI[" "] --> DJ[" "]
    DK[" "] --> DL[" "]
    DJ[" "] --> DW[" "]
    DX[" "] --> DXB[" "]
    DXB --> DXC[" "]
    DXC --> DXD[" "]
    DXD --> DXE[" "]
    DXE --> DXF[" "]
    DXF --> DXG[" "]
    DXG --> DXH[" "]
    DXH --> DXI[" "]
    DXI --> DXJ[" "]
    DXJ --> DXK[" "]
    DXK --> DXL[" "]
    DXL --> DXM[" "]
    DXM --> DXN[" "]
    DXN --> DXO[" "]
    DXO --> DXP[" "]
    DXP --> DXQ[" "]
    DXQ --> DXR[" "]
    DXR --> DXS[" "]
    DXS --> DXT[" "]
    DXT --> DXU[" "]
    DXU --> DXV[" "]
    DXV --> DXW[" "]
    DXW --> DXX[" "]
    DXX --> DXY[" "]
    DXY --> DXZ[" "]
    DXZ --> DXY
    style Front fill:#fff,stroke:#000
    style AY fill:#fff,stroke:#000
    style BZ fill:#fff,stroke:#000
    style CZ fill:#fff,stroke:#000
    style DZ fill:#fff,stroke:#000
    style EY fill:#fff,stroke:#000
    style AF fill:#fff,stroke:#000
    style AG fill:#fff,stroke:#000
    style AH fill:#fff,stroke:#000
    style AI fill:#fff,stroke:#000
    style AJ fill:#fff,stroke:#000
    style AK fill:#fff,stroke:#000
    style AL fill:#fff,stroke:#000
    style AM fill:#fff,stroke:#000
    style AN fill:#fff,stroke:#000
    style AO fill:#fff,stroke:#000
    style AP fill:#fff,stroke:#000
    style AQ fill:#fff,stroke:#000
    style AR fill:#fff,stroke:#000
    style AS fill:#fff,stroke:#000
    style AT fill:#fff,stroke:#000
    style AU fill:#fff,stroke:#000
    style AV fill:#fff,stroke:#000
    style AW fill:#fff,stroke:#000
    style AX fill:#fff,stroke:#000
    style AZ fill:#fff,stroke:#000
    style BA fill:#fff,stroke:#000
    style BB fill:#fff,stroke:#000
    style BC fill:#fff,stroke:#000
    style AD fill:#fff,stroke:#000
    style AE fill:#fff,stroke:#000
    style AF fill:#fff,stroke:#000
    style AG fill:#fff,stroke:#000
    style AH fill:#fff,stroke:#000
    style AI fill:#fff,stroke:#000
    style AJ fill:#fff,stroke:#000
    style AK fill:#fff,stroke:#000
    style AL fill:#fff,stroke:#001
    style AM fill:#fff,stroke:#001
    style AN fill:#fff,stroke:#001
    style AO fill:#fff,stroke:#001
    style AP fill:#fff,stroke:#001
    style AQ fill:#fff,stroke:#001
    style AR fill:#fff,stroke:#001
    style AS fill:#fff,stroke:#001
    style AH fill:#fff,stroke:#001
    style AI fill:#fff,stroke:#001

When to replace your vehicle's tires

Tires should be replaced if:

●The treadwear indicators are showing on a tire.
- You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to expose the fabric, and bulges indicating internal damage
● A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the size or location of a cut or other damage

If you are not sure, consult with your Toyota dealer.

Tire life

Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even if it has seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious.

If the tread on snow tires wears down below 4 mm (0.16 in.)

The effectiveness of the tires as snow tires is lost.

WARNING

■When inspecting or replacing tires

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.

Failure to do so may cause damage to parts of the drivetrain as well as dangerous handling characteristics, which may lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

• Do not mix tires of different makes, models or tread patterns.
  Also, do not mix tires of remarkably different treadwear.
  Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Toyota.
• Do not mix differently constructed tires (radial, bias-belted or bias-ply tires).
• Do not mix summer, all season and snow tires.
• Do not use tires that have been used on another vehicle.
  Do not use tires if you do not know how they were used previously.
• Do not tow if your vehicle has a compact spare tire installed.

NOTICE

■ Driving on rough roads

Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or potholes. These conditions may cause losses in tire inflation pressure, reducing the cushioning ability of the tires. In addition, driving on rough roads may cause damage to the tires themselves, as well as the vehicle's wheels and body.

If tire inflation pressure of each tire becomes low while driving

Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined.

Tire inflation pressure

Make sure to maintain proper tire inflation pressure. Tire inflation pressure should be checked at least once per month. However, Toyota recommends that tire inflation pressure be checked once every two weeks. ( P. 454)

■Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure

Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following:

●Reduced fuel economy
●Reduced driving comfort and poor handling
●Reduced tire life due to wear
- Reduced safety
●Damage to the drivetrain

If a tire needs frequent inflating, have it checked by your Toyota dealer.

■Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure

When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following:

• Check only when the tires are cold.
  If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours or has not been driven for more than 1.5 km or 1 mile, you will get an accurate cold tire inflation pressure reading.
  ● Always use a tire pressure gauge.
  It is difficult to judge if a tire is properly inflated based only on its appearance.
• It is normal for the tire inflation pressure to be higher after driving as heat is generated in the tire. Do not reduce tire inflation pressure after driving.
  ● Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle is balanced.

WARNING

■Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance

Keep your tires properly inflated.

If the tires are not properly inflated, the following conditions may occur which could lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury:

●Excessive wear
Uneven wear
Poor handling
● Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires
●Air leaking from between tire and wheel
●Wheel deformation and/or tire damage
●Greater possibility of tire damage while driving (due to road hazards, expansion joints, sharp edges in the road, etc.)

NOTICE

■When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure

Be sure to put the tire valve caps back on.

If a valve cap is not installed, dirt or moisture may get into the valve and cause an air leak, resulting in decreased tire inflation pressure.

Wheels

If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be replaced. Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or cause a loss of handling control.

Wheel selection

When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that they are equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter, rim width and inset*.

Replacement wheels are available at your Toyota dealer.

*: Conventionally referred to as "offset".

Toyota does not recommend using the following:

●Wheels of different sizes or types
●Used wheels
●Bent wheels that have been straightened

Aluminum wheel precautions

• Use only Toyota wheel nuts and wrenches designed for use with your aluminum wheels.
• When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1600 km (1000 miles).
• Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using tire chains.
• Use only Toyota genuine balance weights or equivalent and a plastic or rubber hammer when balancing your wheels.

WARNING

■When replacing wheels

• Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in the Owner's Manual, as this may result in a loss of handling control.
  ●Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tubeless tire. Doing so may result in an accident, causing death or serious injury.

■When installing the wheel nuts

- Be sure to install the wheel nuts with the tapered ends facing inward. Installing the nuts with the tapered ends facing outward can cause the wheel to break and eventually cause the wheel to come off while driving, which could lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

● Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts. Oil and grease may cause the wheel nuts to be excessively tightened, leading to bolt or disc wheel damage. In addition, the oil or grease can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel may fall off, causing an accident and resulting in death or serious injury. Remove any oil or grease from the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.

■Use of defective wheels prohibited

Do not use cracked or deformed wheels.

Doing so could cause the tire to leak air during driving, possibly causing an accident.

Air conditioning filter

The air conditioning filter must be changed regularly to maintain air conditioning efficiency.

Removal method

1 Turn the power switch off.
2 Open the glove box. Slide off the damper.

3 Push in the glove box on the vehicle's outer side to disconnect the claws. Then pull out the glove box and disconnect the lower claws.

4 Remove the filter cover.

Mechanical component diagram showing a highlighted lever mechanism with an arrow indicator (no text or symbols present)

■ Replacement method

Remove the air conditioning filter and replace it with a new one.

The “↑UP” marks shown on the filter should be pointing up.

- Checking interval

Inspect and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, early replacement may be required. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the "Warranty and Service Booklet".)

If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically

The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary.

NOTICE

■When using the air conditioning system

Make sure that a filter is always installed.

Using the air conditioning system without a filter may cause damage to the system.

Electronic key battery

Replace the battery with a new one if it is depleted or "Key Battery Low" is displayed on the multi-information display.

You will need the following items:

●Flathead screwdriver
●Small flathead screwdriver
●Lithium battery CR2032

Replacing the battery

1 Take out the mechanical key.

Diagram of a device casing with two ports and directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

2 Remove the cover. To prevent damage to the key, cover the tip of the screwdriver with a rag.

Diagram of a USB drive with two pink arrows indicating rotation, no text or symbols present

3 Remove the depleted battery. Insert a new battery with the “+” terminal facing up.

■Use a CR2032 lithium battery

●Batteries can be purchased at your Toyota dealer, local electrical appliance shops or camera stores.
- Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
● Dispose of used batteries according to local laws.

If the key battery is depleted

The following symptoms may occur:

• The smart entry & start system and wireless remote control will not function properly.
  ●The operational range will be reduced.

WARNING

■Removed battery and other parts

These parts are small and if swallowed by a child, they can cause choking. Keep away from children. Failure to do so could result in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

For normal operation after replacing the battery

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents:

●Always work with dry hands.
Moisture may cause the battery to rust.
- Do not touch or move any other component inside the remote control.
- Do not bend either of the battery terminals.

Checking and replacing fuses

If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may have blown. If this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary.

1 Turn the power switch off.
2 Open the fuse box cover.

▶ Engine compartment

Push the tab in and lift the lid off.

Technical diagram of an engine component with a highlighted section and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

▶ Under the instrument panel

Type A:

Remove the cover and then remove the lid.

Type B:

① Open the glove box. Slide off the damper.
② Push in each side of the glove box disconnect the upper claws. Then pull out the glove box and disconnect the lower claws.

3 Remove the fuse with the pull-out tool.

Only type A fuses can be removed using the pullout tool.

Technical diagram of an internal combustion engine block with no visible text or symbols

4 Check if the fuse is blown.

① Normal fuse
② Blown fuse

Type A, B, C and D:

Replace the blown fuse with a new fuse of an appropriate amperage rating. The amperage rating can be found on the fuse box lid.

Type E:

Contact your Toyota dealer.

▶ Type A

Two identical line drawings of a mechanical component with internal channels, labeled ① and ② (no text or symbols on the components themselves)

▶ Type B

▶ Type C

Two 3D model diagrams of plastic bins with internal mechanisms, labeled ① and ② (no text or symbols on the bins themselves)

Type D

Two technical line drawings of battery compartments, labeled ① and ②, with no visible text or symbols on the diagrams themselves.

▶ Type E

■After a fuse is replaced

• If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb may need replacement. (→P. 387)
• If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

If there is an overload in a circuit

The fuses are designed to blow, protecting the wiring harness from damage.

■When replacing light bulbs

Toyota recommends that you use genuine Toyota products designed for this vehicle. Because certain bulbs are connected to circuits designed to prevent overload, non-genuine parts or parts not designed for this vehicle may be unusable.

WARNING

■To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause damage to the vehicle, and possibly a fire or injury.

●Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than that indicated, or use any other object in place of a fuse.
●Always use a genuine Toyota fuse or equivalent.
Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix.
- Do not modify the fuses or fuse boxes.

NOTICE

Before replacing fuses

Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

Light bulbs

You may replace the following bulbs by yourself. The difficulty level of replacement varies depending on the bulb. As there is a danger that components may be damaged, we recommend that replacement is carried out by your Toyota dealer.

Preparing for light bulb replacement

Check the wattage of the light bulb to be replaced. (→P. 455)

Bulb locations

Front

① Front turn signal lights
② Front fog lights (if equipped)

Rear

① Back-up lights
② Stop lights
③ Rear turn signal lights
④ License plate lights

CTH63AP166

Replacing light bulbs

■ Front fog lights (if equipped)

1 Turn the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the light to be replaced.

Turn the steering wheel to a point that allows your hand to easily fit between the tire and fender liner.

2 Remove the 2 screws and partly remove the fender liner.

3 Partly remove the fender liner until the bulb is visible.

4 Unplug the connector while pressing the lock release.

Diagram of a mechanical component with a pink arrow indicating rotational motion (no text or symbols)

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a connector with purple arrows indicating direction (no text or symbols present)

5 Turn the bulb base counterclockwise and remove it.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a valve mechanism with a pink arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols present)

6 Install a new light bulb. Align the 3 tabs on the light bulb with the mounting and insert. Turn clockwise and secure the bulb base.

7 Install the connector. Shake the connector gently to check that it is not loose, turn the front fog lights on once and visually confirm that no light is leaking through the mounting.

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with a highlighted component and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

832 When installing the fender liner, install by conducting and with the directions reversed.

Make sure that the fender liner is attached to the inside of the bumper.

■ Front turn signal lights

1 Remove the securing clip and pull out the washer fluid filler opening. (When replacing right side bulb only.)

2 Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

3 Remove the light bulb.

Diagram of a plug connector with a pink arrow indicating insertion or transformation (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

432 When installing the light bulb, with the directions reversed.

install by conducting □ and □

5 Install the washer fluid filler opening and then install the securing clip. (When replacing right side bulb only.)

■ Stop lights and rear turn signal lights

1 Open the back door and remove the 2 screws. Remove the lamp assembly by pulling it straight back.

2 Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

① Stop lights
② Rear turn signal lights

3 Remove the light bulb.

① Stop lights
② Rear turn signal lights

432 When installing the light bulb, install by conducting and with the directions reversed.
5 Install the lamp assembly and then install the 2 screws.

Align the guide (1) and pin (2) on the lamp assembly with the mounting when installing it.

■ Back-up lights

1 Open the back door and remove the cover.

Insert a flathead screwdriver or similar into the hole at the top of the cover and remove it as shown in the illustration.

To prevent damaging the vehicle, wrap the flathead screw-driver with a tape.

2 Turn the bulb base counterclockwise and remove it.

Diagram of a car interior showing the rear compartment with a side panel and a close-up inset view (no text or symbols)

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with no visible text or symbols

3 Remove the light bulb.

Diagram showing a light bulb connected to a plug with a pink arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

4 When installing, reverse the steps listed.

■ License plate lights

1 Remove the light unit.

Insert a flathead screwdriver or similar into the hole next to the light and remove it as shown in the illustration.

To prevent damaging the vehicle, wrap the flathead screw-driver with a tape.

2 Turn the bulb base counterclockwise and remove it.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical device with a highlighted component and arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

3 Remove the light bulb.

Diagram of a mechanical component with a pink arrow pointing to a connector (no text or symbols present)

4 When installing, reverse the steps listed.

■ Replacing the following bulbs

If any of the lights listed below has burnt out, have it replaced by your Toyota dealer.

●Headlights
●Front position lights
●Side turn signal lights
●Tail lights
●High mounted stoplight

LED light bulbs

The headlights, tail lights, high mounted stoplight and front position lights consist of a number of LEDs. If any of the LEDs burn out, take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer to have the light replaced.

■Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens

Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens does not indicate a malfunction.

Contact your Toyota dealer for more information in the following situations:

● Large drops of water have built up on the inside of the lens.
●Water has built up inside the headlight.

■When replacing light bulbs

→P. 386

WARNING

■Replacing light bulbs

●Turn off the lights. Do not attempt to replace the bulb immediately after turning off the lights.
The bulbs become very hot and may cause burns.
- Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. When it is unavoidable to hold the glass portion, use and hold with a clean dry cloth to avoid getting moisture and oils on the bulb.
Also, if the bulb is scratched or dropped, it may blow out or crack.
● Fully install light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Failure to do so may result in heat damage, fire, or water entering the headlight unit. This may damage the headlights or cause condensation to build up on the lens.

■To prevent damage or fire

Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked.

Not for Reproduction

8-1. Essential information

Emergency flashers......398

If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency....399

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If your vehicle needs to be towed....400

If you think something is wrong 405

If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds ....406

If a warning message is displayed....411

If you have a flat tire .....419

If the hybrid system will not start....429

If the electronic key does not operate properly....431

If the 12-volt battery is discharged....433

If your vehicle overheats....438

If the vehicle becomes stuck ....442

Emergency flashers

The emergency flashers are used to warn other drivers when the vehicle has to be stopped in the road due to a breakdown, etc.

Press the switch.

All the turn signal lights will flash. To turn them off, press the switch once again.

Emergency flashers

If the emergency flashers are used for a long time while the hybrid system is not operating (while the "READY" indicator is not illuminated), the 12-volt battery may discharge.

If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency

Only in an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the vehicle in the normal way, stop the vehicle using the following procedure:

1 Steadily step on the brake pedal with both feet and firmly depress it. Do not pump the brake pedal repeatedly as this will increase the effort required to slow the vehicle.
2 Change the shift position to N.
▶ If the shift position can be changed to N
3 After slowing down, stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.
4 Stop the hybrid system.
▶ If the shift position cannot be changed to N
3 Keep depressing the brake pedal with both feet to reduce vehicle speed as much as possible.

4 To stop the hybrid system, press and hold the power switch for 2 consecutive seconds or more, or press it briefly 3 times or more in succession.

Press and hold for 2 seconds or more, or press briefly 3 times or more

CTH71AP006

5 Stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.

WARNING

If the hybrid system has to be turned off while driving

Power assist for the steering wheel will be lost, making the steering wheel heavier to turn. Decelerate as much as possible before turning off the hybrid system.

If your vehicle needs to be towed

If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by your Toyota dealer or commercial towing service, using a wheel-lift type truck or flatbed truck.

Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/provincial and local laws.

Situations when it is not possible to be towed by another vehicle

In the following situations, it is not possible to be towed by another vehicle using cables or chains, as the front wheels may be locked due to the parking lock. Contact your Toyota dealer or commercial towing service.

● There is a malfunction in the shift control system. (→P. 411)
● There is a malfunction in the immobilizer system. (→P. 75)
● There is a malfunction in the smart entry & start system. (→P. 431)
● The 12-volt battery is discharged. (→P. 433)

Situations when it is necessary to contact dealers before towing

The following may indicate a problem with your transmission. Contact your Toyota dealer or commercial towing service before towing.

●A warning message for the hybrid system is shown on the multi-information display and the vehicle does not move.
●The vehicle makes an abnormal sound.

Towing with a sling-type truck

Do not tow with a sling-type truck to prevent body damage.

Towing with a wheel-lift type truck

From the front

Silhouette illustration of a truck and a car on a road, connected by an electric vehicle charging (no text or symbols)

Release the parking brake. Use

From the rear

Silhouette illustration of a truck and a car on a road, with no visible text or symbols

a towing dolly under the front wheels.

Using a flatbed truck

If your vehicle is transported by a flatbed truck, it should be tied down at the locations shown in the illustration.

If you use chains or cables to tie down your vehicle, the angles shaded in black must be 45^ .

Do not overly tighten the tie downs or the vehicle may be damaged.

Line drawing of a car on a flatbed truck with triangular supports (no text or symbols)

Emergency towing

If a tow truck is not available in an emergency, your vehicle may be temporarily towed using cables or chains secured to the emergency towing eyelets. This should only be attempted on hard surfaced roads for short distance at under 30 km/h (18 mph).

A driver must be in the vehicle to steer and operate the brakes. The vehicle's wheels, drive train, axles, steering and brakes must be in good condition.

Emergency towing procedure

1 Take out the towing eyelet. ( P. 420)
2 Remove the eyelet cover using a flathead screwdriver.

To prevent damage, cover the tip of the screwdriver with a rag.

3 Insert the towing eyelet into the hole and tighten partially by hand.

Diagram of a car wheel assembly with a belt switch and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

4 Tighten down the towing eyelet securely using a wheel nut wrench or hard metal bar.

Diagram of a car interior showing a lock mechanism with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

5 Securely attach cables or chains to the towing eyelet.

Take care not to damage the vehicle body.

6 Enter the vehicle being towed and start the hybrid system.

If the hybrid system does not start, turn the power switch to ON mode.

7 Shift the shift position to N and release the parking brake.

While towing

If the hybrid system is off, the power assist for the brakes and steering will not function, making steering and braking more difficult.

Wheel nut wrench

Wheel nut wrench is installed in the luggage compartment. ( P. 420)

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

■When towing the vehicle

Be sure to transport the vehicle with the front wheels raised or with all four wheels raised off the ground. If the vehicle is towed with the front wheels contacting the ground, the drivetrain and related parts may be damaged or electricity generated by the operation of the motor may cause a fire to occur depending on the nature of the damage or malfunction.

While towing

• When towing using cables or chains, avoid sudden starts, etc. which place excessive stress on the towing eyelets, cables or chains. The towing eyelets, cables or chains may become damaged, broken debris may hit people, and cause serious damage.
  ●Do not turn the power switch off.
  This may lead to an accident as the front wheels will be locked by the parking lock.

■Installing towing eyelets to the vehicle

Make sure that towing eyelets are installed securely.

If not securely installed, towing eyelets may come loose during towing.

NOTICE

■To prevent damage to the vehicle when towing using a wheel-lift type truck

• Do not tow the vehicle from the rear when the power switch is off. The steering lock mechanism is not strong enough to hold the front wheels straight.
  When raising the vehicle, ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at the opposite end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the vehicle could be damaged while being towed.

■ To prevent damage to the vehicle when towing with a sling-type truck

Do not tow with a sling-type truck, either from the front or rear.

■ To prevent damage to the vehicle during emergency towing

Do not secure cables or chains to the suspension components.

If you think something is wrong

If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably needs adjustment or repair. Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

Visible symptoms

●Fluid leaks under the vehicle.
(Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.)
●Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear
●High engine coolant temperature warning light comes on.

Audible symptoms

●Changes in exhaust sound
●Excessive tire squeal when cornering
●Strange noises related to the suspension system
●Pinging or other noises related to the hybrid system

Operational symptoms

●Engine missing, stumbling or running roughly
●Appreciable loss of power
●Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking
●Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road
- Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost touches the floor

If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds

Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights comes on or flashes. If a light comes on or flashes, but then goes off, this does not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the system. However, if this continues to occur, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

Warning light and warning buzzer list

Warning light	Warning light/Details/Actions
	Brake system warning light in red (warning buzzer)*1Indicates that:The brake fluid level is low; orThe brake system is malfunctioningThis light also comes on when the parking brake is not released. If the light turns off after the parking brake is fully released the system is operating normally.→Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Toyota dealer. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.
	Brake system warning light in yellowIndicates a malfunction in:The regenerative brake system; orThe electronically controlled brake system→Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
	High engine coolant temperature warning lightIndicates that the engine is almost overheating. (→P. 438)→Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Toyota dealer.
	Malfunction indicator lampIndicates a malfunction in:The hybrid system;The electronic engine control system; orThe electronic throttle control system→Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.
	SRS warning lightIndicates a malfunction in:The SRS airbag system; orThe seat belt pretensioner system→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.
	ABS warning lightIndicates a malfunction in:The ABS; orThe brake assist system→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.
	Electric power steering system warning light (warning buzzer)Indicates a malfunction in the EPS (Electric Power Steering) system→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.
(Comes on)	Slip indicatorIndicates a malfunction in:The VSC (Vehicle Stability Control) system;The TRC (Traction Control) system; orThe hill-start assist control systemThe light will flash when the ABS, VSC or the TRC is operating.→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.
	PCS warning lightWhen the warning light flashes (and a buzzer sounds):Indicates a malfunction in the PCS (Pre-Collision System)→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.When the warning light flashes (and a buzzer does not sound):Indicates that the PCS (Pre-Collision System) is temporarily unavailable, possibly due to either of the following:• The part of the windshield around the front sensor being dirty, fogged up or covered with condensation, ice, stickers, etc.→ Clear the dirt, fog, condensation, ice, stickers, etc. (→P. 175)• Front sensor temperature being outside of its operational range→ Wait for a while until the area around the front sensor has cooled down sufficiently.When the warning light is illuminated:Either the VSC (Vehicle Stability Control) system or PCS (Pre-Collision System) is disabled or both are disabled.→ To enable the PCS, enable both the VSC system and PCS. (→P. 180, 213)
	Low fuel level warning lightIndicates that remaining fuel is approximately 6.8 L (1.8 gal., 1.5 Imp. gal.) or less→ Refuel the vehicle.
	Driver's and front passenger's seat belt reminder light (warning buzzer)*2Warns the driver and/or front passenger to fasten their seat belts→ Fasten the seat belt.If the front passenger's seat is occupied, the front passenger's seat belt also needs to be fastened to make the warning light (warning buzzer) turn off.
	Rear passengers' seat belt reminder lights (warning buzzer)*2Warns the rear passengers to fasten their seat belts.→ Fasten the seat belt.Master warning lightA buzzer sounds and the warning light comes on and flashes to indicate that the master warning system has detected a malfunction.→ P. 411

*1: Brake system warning buzzer:

When there is a possible problem that could affect braking performance, the warning light will come on and a warning buzzer will sound.

Parking brake engaged warning buzzer:

The buzzer sounds to indicate that the parking brake is still engaged (with the vehicle having reached a speed of 5 km/h [3 mph]).

*2: Driver's and passengers' seat belt buzzer:

The driver's and passengers' seat belt buzzer sounds to alert the driver and passengers that his or her seat belt is not fastened. The buzzer sounds for 30 seconds after the vehicle reaches a speed of at least 20km / h (12 mph). Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different tone for 90 more seconds.

■ Front passenger detection sensor, seat belt reminder and warning buzzer

• If luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger detection sensor may cause the warning light to flash and the warning buzzer to sound even if a passenger is not sitting in the seat.
• If a cushion is placed on the seat, the sensor may not detect a passenger, and the warning light may not operate properly.

If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving

The malfunction indicator lamp will come on if the fuel tank becomes completely empty. If the fuel tank is empty, refuel the vehicle immediately. The malfunction indicator lamp will go off after several trips.

If the malfunction indicator lamp does not go off, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

Warning buzzer

In some cases, the buzzer may not be heard because of noisy place or an audio sound.

Electric power steering system warning light (warning buzzer)

When the 12-volt battery charge becomes insufficient or the voltage temporarily drops, the electric power steering system warning light may come on and the warning buzzer may sound.

WARNING

If both the ABS and the brake system warning lights remain on

Stop your vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact your Toyota dealer. The vehicle will become extremely unstable during braking, and the ABS system may fail, which could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

■ When the electric power steering system warning light comes on

The steering wheel may become extremely heavy. When steering wheel operations are heavier than usual, grip the steering wheel firmly and operate it using more force than usual.

If a warning message is displayed

The multi-information display shows warnings of system malfunctions, incorrectly performed operations, and messages that indicate a need for maintenance. When a message is shown, perform the correction procedure appropriate to the message.

① Master warning light

The master warning light also comes on or flashes in order to indicate that a message is currently being displayed on the multi-information display.

② Multi-information display

If any of the message or indicator comes on again after the following actions have been performed, contact your Toyota dealer.

Messages and warnings

The warning lights and warning buzzers operate as follows depending on the content of the message. If a message indicates the need for inspection by a dealer, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

	Warning buzzer*	Warning
Comes on	Sounds	Indicates an important situation, such as when a system related to driving is malfunctioning or that danger may result if the correction procedure is not performed
Flashes	Sounds	Indicates a situation, such as when damage to the vehicle or danger may result
— Does not sound		Indicates a condition, such as malfunction of electrical components, their condition, or indicates the need for maintenance
Flashes	Does not sound	Indicates a situation, such as when an operation has been performed incorrectly, or indicates how to perform an operation correctly

*: A buzzer sounds the first time a message is shown on the multi-information display

If the shifting operation of the hybrid transmission is rejected

The following messages may be displayed. Take the appropriate action as shown below:

If “Shifting Unavailable Low 12-Volt Battery See Owner’s Manual” is displayed

Indicates that an attempt was made to change the shift position when the voltage of the 12-volt battery was low.

Charge or replace the 12-volt battery.

(If the 12-volt battery is discharged: →P. 433)

If “Shifting Unavailable Wait a Moment and Try Again” is displayed

Indicates that the shift lever and P position switch were operated repeatedly in quick succession.

Wait approximately 20 seconds and then change the shift position.

If "Shifted to N Stop Vehicle to Shift to P" is displayed

Indicates that the P position switch has been pressed while driving and that the shift position has been changed to N automatically. (→P. 154)

To enable shifting to P, stop the vehicle completely and press the P position switch. To continue driving, change the shift position to D or R.

If caution about parking is necessary

If “Shift System Malfunction Apply Parking Brake Securely While Parking See Owner’s Manual” is displayed

• Indicates that the shift control system is malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.
• If either of these messages is displayed, the following situations may occur when attempting to start or turn off the hybrid system or change the shift position:

- The shift position may not be able to be changed to P.

When parking, park on level ground and set the parking brake securely.

• The hybrid system may not be able to be started.
• The power switch may change to ACCESSORY mode when attempting to turn it off.

In this case, set the parking brake and then operate the power switch to turn it off.

- The automatic P position selection function ( P. 145) may not operate.

Before turning the power switch off, make sure to press the P position switch. Verify that the shift position has been changed to P by checking the shift position indicator or the P position switch indicator.

If “Low 12-Volt Battery Apply Parking Brake Securely While Parking See Owner’s Manual” is displayed

• Indicates that the 12-volt battery is not charged sufficiently. Charge or replace the 12-volt battery.
• If this message is displayed, the following situations may occur when attempting to start the hybrid system or change the shift position:

- The shift position may not be able to be changed to P.

When parking, park on level ground and set the parking brake securely.

- The hybrid system may not be able to be started.

●This message may be displayed until the shift position is changed from P after charging the 12-volt battery.

If a message about the hybrid system or hybrid battery (traction battery) is displayed

If any of the following messages are displayed, take the appropriate actions as shown below:

If “Depress Brake When Vehicle Is Stopped Hybrid System May Overheat” is displayed

Message is displayed when the accelerator pedal is depressed to maintain the vehicle position when stopped on an upward slope, etc.

If this continues, the hybrid system may overheat. Release the accelerator pedal and depress the brake pedal.

If “Hybrid Battery Low Hybrid System Stopped Shift to P and Restart” is displayed

Message is displayed when the remaining charge for the hybrid battery (traction battery) is low, because vehicle has been shifted N for a long period of time.

When operating the vehicle, restart the hybrid system.

If “Hybrid System Malfunction Stop in a Safe Place See Owner’s Manual” is displayed

Refer to “If a message instructing to refer to the Owner’s Manual is displayed”. (→P. 417)

If "Hybrid Battery Low Shift Out of N to Recharge" is displayed

Message is displayed when the remaining charge for the hybrid battery (traction battery) is low.

As the hybrid battery (traction battery) cannot be charged when the shift position is in N, when stopped for long periods of time change the shift position to P.

If "Hybrid System Overheated Reduced Output Power" is displayed

This message may be displayed when driving under severe operating conditions.

(For example, when driving up a long steep hill.)

Handling method: →P. 438

If “Maintenance required for hybrid battery cooling parts at your dealer” is displayed

The filter may be clogged, the air intake vent may be blocked or there may be a gap in the duct. Have maintenance performed on the hybrid battery (traction battery) cooling component at your Toyota dealer.

If a message instructing to refer to the Owner's Manual is displayed

If any of the following messages are displayed, take the appropriate actions as shown on the following pages in this Owner's Manual:

●“Shifting Unavailable Low 12-Volt Battery See Owner’s Manual”: →P. 413
- “Shift System Malfunction Apply Parking Brake Securely While Parking See Owner’s Manual”: →P. 414
●“Low 12-Volt Battery Apply Parking Brake Securely While Parking See Owner’s Manual”: →P. 414

If the following messages are displayed, there may be a malfunction.

Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Toyota dealer.

●“Charging System Malfunction See Owner’s Manual”
● “Low Oil Pressure Stop in a Safe Place See Owner’s Manual”
- “Hybrid System Malfunction Stop in a Safe Place See Owner’s Manual”

If the following message is displayed, there may be a malfunction.

Immediately have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

• “Smart Entry & Start System Malfunction See Owner’s Manual”
  ●“Shift System Malfunction See Owner’s Manual”

Other messages displayed on the multi-information display

Take the appropriate actions as instructed in the message displayed. If any of the following messages are displayed, also refer to this Owner's Manual.

If “Headlight System Malfunction Visit Your Dealer” is displayed

The following systems may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

●The LED headlight system
●The automatic headlight leveling system
●Automatic High Beam

If “Front Camera Systems Unavailable Wait a Moment” or “Front Camera Systems Unavailable Clean Windshield” is displayed (if equipped)

The following systems may be suspended until the problem shown in the message is resolved.

●PCS (Pre-Collision System)
●LDA (Lane Departure Alert)
●Automatic High Beam

If “Shift to P Before Exiting Vehicle” is displayed

Message is displayed when the driver's door is opened without turning the power switch to off with the shift position in any position other than P.

Change the shift position to P.

If “Shift Is in N Release Accelerator Before Shifting” is displayed

Message is displayed when the accelerator pedal has been depressed and the shift position is in N.

Release the accelerator pedal and change the shift position to D or R.

Warning buzzer

In some cases, the buzzer may not be heard because of noisy place or an audio sound.

If you have a flat tire

Your vehicle is equipped with a spare tire. The flat tire can be replaced with the spare tire.

For details about tires: →P. 372

WARNING

If you have a flat tire

Do not continue driving with a flat tire.

Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the wheel beyond repair, which could result in an accident.

Before jacking up the vehicle

• Stop the vehicle in a safe place on a hard, flat surface.
• Set the parking brake.
  ●Shift the shift position to P.
• Stop the hybrid system.
  ● Turn on the emergency flashers. ( P. 398)

Location of the spare tire, jack and tools

① Tool bag
② Wheel nut wrench
③ Jack handle

④ Towing eyelet
⑤ Jack
⑥ Spare tire

WARNING

■Using the tire jack

Observe the following precautions.

Improper use of the tire jack may cause the vehicle to suddenly fall off the jack, leading to death or serious injury.

• Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or installing and removing tire chains.
• Only use the tire jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat tire. Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other tire jacks for replacing tires on this vehicle.
  ●Put the jack properly in its jack point.
• Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle while it is supported by the jack.
• Do not start the hybrid system or drive the vehicle while the vehicle is supported by the jack.
• Do not raise the vehicle while someone is inside.
• When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack.
• Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to replace the tire.
  ●Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle.
• When lowering the vehicle, make sure that there is no-one near the vehicle. If there are people nearby, warn them vocally before lowering.

Taking out the jack

1 Remove the deck mat. ( P. 340)
2 Take out the jack.

① For tightening

② For loosening

Taking out the spare tire

1 Remove the deck mat and tray. (→P. 340)

Top-down technical diagram of a car's rear compartment showing structural components and a highlighted arrow (no text or symbols)

2 Loosen the center fastener that secures the spare tire.

Technical diagram of a car interior showing a central mechanical component and surrounding compartments (no text or symbols)

WARNING

■When storing the spare tire

Be careful not to catch fingers or other body parts between the spare tire and the body of the vehicle.

Replacing a flat tire

1 Chock the tires.

Line drawing of a car with visible headlights and exhaust, no text or symbols present

Flat tire Wheel chock positions
Front	Left-hand side Behind the rear right-hand side tire
	Right-hand side Behind the rear left-hand side tire
Rear	Left-hand side In front of the front right-hand side tire
	Right-hand side In front of the front left-hand side tire

2 Slightly loosen the wheel nuts (one turn).

3 Turn the tire jack portion "A" by hand until the notch of the jack is in contact with the jack point.

The jack point guides are located under the rocker panel. They indicate the jack point positions.

4 Assemble the jack handle extension.

5 Raise the vehicle until the tire is slightly raised off the ground.

6 Remove all the wheel nuts and the tire.

When resting the tire on the ground, place the tire so that the wheel design faces up to avoid scratching the wheel surface.

Illustration of hands operating a car wheel rim with a circular component and four small circular holes (no text or symbols)

WARNING

■Replacing a flat tire

- Do not touch the disc wheels or the area around the brakes immediately after the vehicle has been driven.

After the vehicle has been driven the disc wheels and the area around the brakes will be extremely hot. Touching these areas with hands, feet or other body parts while changing a tire, etc. may result in burns.

●Failure to follow these precautions could cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the tire to fall off, resulting in death or serious injury.

- Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts. Oil and grease may cause the wheel nuts to be excessively tightened, leading to bolt or disc wheel damage. In addition, the oil or grease can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel may fall off, causing a serious accident. Remove any oil or grease from the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.

- Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 103 N·m (10.5 kgf·m, 76 ft·lbf) as soon as possible after changing wheels.

- Do not attach a heavily damaged wheel ornament, as it may fly off the wheel while the vehicle is moving.

- When installing a tire, only use wheel nuts that have been specifically designed for that wheel.

- If there are any cracks or deformations in the bolt screws, nut threads or bolt holes of the wheel, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

- When installing the wheel nuts, be sure to install them with the tapered ends facing inward. (→P. 378)

Installing the spare tire

1 Remove any dirt or foreign matter from the wheel contact surface.

If foreign matter is on the wheel contact surface, the wheel nuts may loosen while the vehicle is in motion, causing the tire to come off.

2 Install the tire and loosely tighten each wheel nut by hand by approximately the same amount.

Tighten the wheel nuts until the tapered portion comes into loose contact with the disc wheel seat.

3 Lower the vehicle.

Line drawing showing hands cleaning a car interior with a washing machine and a circular basin (no text or symbols)

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a lever mechanism with a pink arrow indicating rotational motion (no text or symbols present)

4 Firmly tighten each wheel nut two or three times in the order shown in the illustration.

Tightening torque: 103 N·m (10.5 kgf·m, 76 ft·lbf)

5 Stow the flat tire, tire jack and all tools.

The compact spare tire

●The compact spare tire is identified by the label "TEMPORARY USE ONLY" on the tire sidewall.

Use the compact spare tire temporarily, and only in an emergency.

● Make sure to check the tire inflation pressure of the compact spare tire. (→P. 454)

When the compact spare tire is equipped

The vehicle becomes lower when driving with the compact spare tire compared to when driving with standard tires.

If you have a flat front tire on a road covered with snow or ice

Install the compact spare tire on one of the rear wheels of the vehicle. Perform the following steps and fit tire chains to the front tires:

1 Replace a rear tire with the compact spare tire.
2 Replace the flat front tire with the tire removed from the rear of the vehicle.
3 Fit tire chains to the front tires.

WARNING

■When using the compact spare tire

●Remember that the compact spare tire provided is specifically designed for use with your vehicle. Do not use your compact spare tire on another vehicle.
- Do not use more than one compact spare tires simultaneously.
- Replace the compact spare tire with a standard tire as soon as possible.
● Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt steering, sudden braking and shifting operations that cause sudden engine braking.

■When the compact spare tire is attached

The vehicle speed may not be correctly detected, and the following systems may not operate correctly:

• ABS & Brake assist
• VSC
- TRC
• Automatic High Beam (if equipped)

• Cruise control
• EPS
  • PCS (Pre-Collision System) (if equipped)
  • LDA (Lane departure alert) (if equipped)

■Speed limit when using the compact spare tire

Do not drive at speeds in excess of 80 km/h (50 mph) when a compact spare tire is installed on the vehicle.

The compact spare tire is not designed for driving at high speeds. Failure to observe this precaution may lead to an accident causing death or serious injury.

■After using the tools and jack

Before driving, make sure all the tools and jack are securely in place in their storage location to reduce the possibility of personal injury during a collision or sudden braking.

NOTICE

■ Be careful when driving over bumps with the compact spare tire installed on the vehicle.

The vehicle becomes lower when driving with the compact spare tire compared to when driving with standard tires. Be careful when driving over uneven road surfaces.

- Driving with tire chains and the compact spare tire

Do not fit tire chains to the compact spare tire.

Tire chains may damage the vehicle body and adversely affect driving performance.

If the hybrid system will not start

Reasons for the hybrid system not starting vary depending on the situation. Check the following and perform the appropriate procedure:

The hybrid system will not start even though the correct starting procedure is being followed. ( P. 142)

One of the following may be the cause of the problem:

● The electronic key may not be functioning properly. (→P. 432)
- There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle's tank. Refuel the vehicle.
● There may be a malfunction in the immobilizer system. (→P. 75)
●There may be malfunction in the shift control system. * (→P. 145, 411)
●The hybrid system may be malfunctioning due to an electrical problem such as electronic key battery depletion or a blown fuse. However, depending on the type of malfunction, an interim measure is available to start the hybrid system. (→P. 430)

* : It may not be possible to shift the shift position from P to another position.

The interior lights and headlights are dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at a low volume.

One of the following may be the cause of the problem:

● The 12-volt battery may be discharged. ( P. 433)
●The 12-volt battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded. (→P. 368)

The interior lights and headlights do not turn on, or the horn does not sound.

One of the following may be the cause of the problem:

● The 12-volt battery may be discharged. (→P. 433)
● One or both of the 12-volt battery terminals may be disconnected. (→P. 368)

Contact your Toyota dealer if the problem cannot be repaired, or if repair procedures are unknown.

Emergency start function

When the hybrid system does not start, the following steps can be used as an interim measure to start the hybrid system if the power switch is functioning normally.

Do not use this starting procedure except in case of emergency.

1 Set the parking brake.
2 Turn the power switch to ACCESSORY mode.
3 Press and hold the power switch for about 15 seconds while depressing the brake pedal firmly.

Even if the hybrid system can be started using the above steps, the system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

If the electronic key does not operate properly

If communication between the electronic key and vehicle is interrupted ( P. 113) or the electronic key cannot be used because the battery is depleted, the smart entry & start system and wireless remote control cannot be used. In such cases, the doors can be opened and the hybrid system can be started by following the procedure below.

Locking and unlocking the doors

Use the mechanical key ( P. 98) in order to perform the following operations:

① Unlocks all the doors
② Locks all the doors

Starting the hybrid system

1 Depress the brake pedal.
2 Touch the Toyota emblem side of the electronic key to the power switch.

When the electronic key is detected, a buzzer sounds and the power switch will turn to ON mode. When the smart entry & start system is deactivated in customization setting, the power switch will turn to ACCESSORY mode.

Line drawing of a hand holding a key inside a vehicle's seat (no text or symbols)

3 Firmly depress the brake pedal and check that is shown on the multi-information display.

4 Press the power switch.

In the event that the hybrid system still cannot be started, contact your Toyota dealer.

■ Stopping the hybrid system

Set the parking brake, shift the shift position to P and press the power switch as you normally do when stopping the hybrid system.

■Replacing the key battery

As the above procedure is a temporary measure, it is recommended that the electronic key battery be replaced immediately when the battery is depleted. (→P. 381)

■ Changing power switch modes

Release the brake pedal and press the power switch in step above. The hybrid system does not start and modes will be changed each time the switch is pressed. (→P. 144)

When the electronic key does not work properly

Make sure that the smart entry & start system has not been deactivated in the customization setting. If it is off, turn the function on.
(Customizable features → P. 457)
- Check if battery-saving mode is set. If it is set, cancel the function. (→P. 112)

If the 12-volt battery is discharged

The following procedures may be used to start the hybrid system if the 12-volt battery is discharged.

You can also call your Toyota dealer or a qualified repair shop.

If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehicle with a 12-volt battery, you can jump start your vehicle by following the steps below.

1 Open the hood and fuse block cover.

Push the tabs in and lift the lid off.

2 Open the exclusive jump starting terminal cover.

3 Connect the jumper cables according to the following procedure:

① Connect a positive jumper cable clamp to the exclusive jump starting terminal on your vehicle.
② Connect the clamp on the other end of the positive cable to the positive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicle.
③ Connect a negative cable clamp to the negative (-) battery terminal on the second vehicle.
④ Connect the clamp at the other end of the negative cable to a solid, stationary, unpainted metallic point away from the exclusive jump starting terminal and any moving parts, as shown in the illustration.

4 Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine speed slightly and maintain at that level for approximately 5 minutes to recharge the 12-volt battery of your vehicle.
5 Open and close any of the doors of your vehicle with the power switch off.
6 Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle and start the hybrid system of your vehicle by turning the power switch to ON mode.
7 Make sure the "READY" indicator comes on. If the indicator does not come on, contact your Toyota dealer.

8 Once the hybrid system has started, remove the jumper cables in the exact reverse order from which they were connected.
9 Close the exclusive jump starting terminal cover, and reinstall the fuse box cover to its original position.

When installing, first hook the fuse box cover onto the two rear tabs.

Once the hybrid system starts, have the vehicle inspected at your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

■ Starting the hybrid system when the 12-volt battery is discharged

The hybrid system cannot be started by push-starting.

■To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

●Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the hybrid system is off.
● Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is running at a low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic.

■When the 12-volt battery is removed or discharged

●The hybrid system may not start.
- If the 12-volt battery is depleted with the P shift position selected, it will not be possible to shift the shift position other than P. In this case, the vehicle cannot be towed without lifting both front wheels because the front wheels are locked by the parking lock. (→P. 401)
- When the 12-volt battery is reconnected, start the hybrid system, depress the brake pedal, and confirm that it is possible to shift into each shift position.

- Charging the 12-volt battery

The electricity stored in the 12-volt battery will discharge gradually even when the vehicle is not in use, due to natural discharge and the draining effects of certain electrical appliances. If the vehicle is left for a long time, the 12-volt battery may discharge, and the hybrid system may be unable to start. (The 12-volt battery recharges automatically while the hybrid system is operating.)

■When recharging or replacing the 12-volt battery

In some cases, it may not be possible to unlock the doors using the smart entry & start system when the 12-volt battery is discharged. Use the wireless remote control or the mechanical key to lock or unlock the doors.
●The hybrid system may not start on the first attempt after the 12-volt battery has recharged but will start normally after the second attempt. This is not a malfunction.
- The power switch mode is memorized by the vehicle. When the 12-volt battery is reconnected, the system will return to the mode it was in before the 12-volt battery was discharged. Before disconnecting the 12-volt battery, turn the power switch off.
If you are unsure what mode the power switch was in before the 12-volt battery discharged, be especially careful when reconnecting the 12-volt battery.

WARNING

■Avoiding 12-volt battery fires or explosions

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flammable gas that may be emitted from the 12-volt battery:

● Make sure each jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that it is not unintentionally in contact with any other than the intended terminal.
- Do not allow the other end of the jumper cable connected to the “+” terminal to come into contact with any other parts or metal surfaces in the area, such as brackets or unpainted metal.
- Do not allow the + and - clamps of the jumper cables to come into contact with each other.
- Do not smoke, use matches, cigarette lighters or allow open flame near the 12-volt battery.

WARNING

■12-volt battery precautions

The 12-volt battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while related parts contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following precautions when handling the 12-volt battery:

• When working with the 12-volt battery, always wear safety glasses and take care not to allow any 12-volt battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing or the vehicle body.
  ●Do not lean over the 12-volt battery.
  In the event that 12-volt battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes, immediately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention.
  Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention can be received.
  ●Always wash your hands after handling the 12-volt battery support, terminals, and other battery-related parts.
• Do not allow children near the 12-volt battery.

■After recharging the 12-volt battery

Have the 12-volt battery inspected at your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

If the 12-volt battery is deteriorating, continued use may cause the 12-volt battery to emit a malodorous gas, which may be detrimental to the health of passengers.

■When replacing the 12-volt battery

→P. 371

NOTICE

■When handling jumper cables

When connecting the jumper cables, ensure that they do not become entangled in the cooling fans.

■ Exclusive jump starting terminal

The exclusive jump starting terminal is to be used when charging the 12-volt battery from another vehicle in an emergency. It cannot be used to jump start another vehicle.

If your vehicle overheats

The following may indicate that your vehicle is overheating.

● The high engine coolant temperature warning light ( P. 406) comes on or a loss of hybrid system power is experienced (for example, the vehicle speed does not increase).
●“Hybrid System Overheated Reduced Output Power” is shown on the multi-information display.
●Steam comes out from under the hood.

Correction procedures

If the high engine coolant temperature warning light comes on

1 Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air conditioning system, and then stop the hybrid system.
2 If you see steam: Carefully lift the hood after the steam subsides.

If you do not see steam:

Carefully lift the hood.

3 After the hybrid system has cooled down sufficiently, inspect the hoses and radiator core (radiator) for any leaks.

① Radiator
② Cooling fans

If a large amount of coolant leaks, immediately contact your Toyota dealer.

4 The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the "FULL" and "LOW" lines on the reservoir.

① Reservoir
② “FULL”
③ “LOW”

5 Add coolant if necessary.

Water can be used in an emergency if coolant is unavailable.

Technical diagram of a car engine bay with internal components and a close-up inset showing mechanical assembly (no text or symbols)

6 Start the hybrid system and turn the air conditioning system on to check that the radiator cooling fans operate and to check for coolant leaks from the radiator or hoses.

The fans operate when the air conditioning system is turned on immediately after a cold start. Confirm that the fans are operating by checking the fan sound and air flow. If it is difficult to check these, turn the air conditioning system on and off repeatedly.

(The fan may not operate in freezing temperatures.)

7 If the fans are not operating:

Stop the hybrid system immediately and contact your Toyota dealer.

If the fans are operating:

Have the vehicle inspected at the nearest Toyota dealer.

If “Hybrid System Overheated Reduced Output Power” is shown on the multi-information display

1 Stop the vehicle in a safe place.
2 Stop the hybrid system and carefully lift the hood.
3 After the hybrid system has cooled down, inspect the hoses and radiator core (radiator) for any leaks.

① Radiator
② Cooling fans

If a large amount of coolant leaks, immediately contact your Toyota dealer.

4 The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the "FULL" and "LOW" lines on the reservoir.

① Reservoir
② “FULL”
③ “LOW”

5 Add coolant if necessary.

Water can be used in an emergency if coolant is unavailable.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a hand pouring liquid into a car engine component (no text or symbols visible)

6 After stopping the hybrid system and waiting for 5 minutes or more, start the hybrid system again and check if “Hybrid System Overheated Reduced Output Power” is shown on the multi-information display.

If the message does not disappear:

Stop the hybrid system and contact your Toyota dealer.

If the message is not displayed:

The hybrid system temperature has dropped and the vehicle may be driven normally.

However, if the message appears again frequently, contact your Toyota dealer.

WARNING

■When inspecting under the hood of your vehicle

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in serious injury such as burns.

• If steam is seen coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the steam has subsided. The engine compartment may be very hot.
  ● After the hybrid system has been turned off, check that “Power On” on the multi-information display and the “READY” indicator are off.
  When the hybrid system is operating, the gasoline engine may automatically start, or the cooling fans may suddenly operate even if the gasoline engine stops. Do not touch or approach rotating parts such as the fan, which may lead to fingers or clothing (especially a tie, a scarf or a muffler) getting caught, resulting in serious injury.

- Do not loosen the coolant reservoir caps while the hybrid system and radiator are hot.

High temperature steam or coolant could spray out.

NOTICE

■ When adding engine/power control unit coolant

Add coolant slowly after the hybrid system has cooled down sufficiently.

Adding cool coolant to a hot hybrid system too quickly can cause damage to the hybrid system.

■To prevent damage to the cooling system

Observe the following precautions:

● Avoid contaminating the coolant with foreign matter (such as sand or dust etc.).
- Do not use any coolant additive.

If the vehicle becomes stuck

Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle becomes stuck in mud, dirt or snow:

1 Set the parking brake. Shift the shift position to P and stop the hybrid system.
2 Remove the mud, snow, or sand from around the front wheels.
3 Place wood, stones or some other material under the front wheels to help provide traction.
4 Restart the hybrid system.
5 Shift the shift position to D or R and release the parking brake. Then, while exercising caution, depress the accelerator pedal.

When it is difficult to free the vehicle

Press

urn off TRC.

WARNING

■When attempting to free a stuck vehicle

If you choose to push the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the surrounding area is clear to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or people. The vehicle may also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes free. Use extreme caution.

■When shifting the shift lever

Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed. This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

To avoid damaging the transmission and other components

● Avoid spinning the front wheels and depressing the accelerator pedal more than necessary.
- If the vehicle remains stuck even after these procedures are performed, the vehicle may require towing to be freed.

Not for Reproduction

Vehicle specifications

9

9-1. Specifications

Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)......446

Fuel information......456

9-2. Customization

Customizable features....457

Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)

Dimensions

Overall length 4330 mm (170.5 in.)
Overall width 1760 mm (69.3 in.)
Overall height*		1475 mm (58.1 in.)
Wheelbase 2600 mm (102.4 in.)
Tread	Front 1525 mm (60.0 in.)
	Rear 1515 mm (59.6 in.)

*: Unladen vehicles

Vehicle identification

■ Vehicle identification number

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for your vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your Toyota. It is used in registering the ownership of your vehicle.

This number is stamped under the driver's seat.

This number is also on the manufacturer's label.

Interior view of a car showing seatbelt and door panel (no text or symbols)

Engine number

The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown.

Technical line drawing of an internal combustion engine component with a black arrow indicating motion direction (no text or symbols)

Engine

Model 2ZR-FXE
Type 4-cylinder in line, 4-cycle, gasoline
Bore and stroke	80.5 × 88.3 mm (3.17 × 3.48 in.)
Displacement 1798 cm	^3 (109.7 cu. in.)
Valve clearance Automatic adjustment

Fuel

Fuel type Unleaded gasoline only
Research Octane Number	95 or higher
Fuel tank capacity (Reference)	45 L (11.9 gal., 9.9 Imp. gal.)

Electric motor (traction motor)

Type Permanent magnet motor
Maximum output 60 kW
Maximum torque 207 N·m (21.1 kgf·m, 153 ft·lbf)

Hybrid battery (traction battery)

Type Nickel-Metal hydride	battery
Voltage 7.2 V/module
Capacity 6.5 Ah (3HR)
Quantity 28 modules
Overall voltage 201.6 V

Lubrication system

Oil capacity(Drain and refill — reference*)With filterWithout filter

4.2 L (4.4 qt., 3.7 Imp. qt.)3.9 L (4.1 qt., 3.4 Imp. qt.)

*: The engine oil capacity is a reference quantity to be used when changing the engine oil. Warm up the engine and turn off the hybrid system, wait more than 5 minutes, and check the oil level on the dipstick.

■ Engine oil selection

"Toyota Genuine Motor Oil" is used in your Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved "Toyota Genuine Motor Oil" or equivalent to satisfy the following grade and viscosity.

Oil grade:

0W-20, 5W-20, 5W-30 and 10W-30:

API grade SL “Energy-Conserving”, SM “Energy-Conserving” or SN “Resource-Conserving”; or ILSAC multigrade engine oil

15W-40:

API grade SL, SM or SN multigrade engine oil

Recommended viscosity (SAE):

If you use SAE 10W-30 or a higher viscosity engine oil in extremely low temperatures, the engine may become difficult to start, so SAE 0W-20, 5W-20 or 5W-30 engine oil is recommended.

Oil viscosity (0W-20 is explained here as an example):

• The 0W in 0W-20 indicates the characteristic of the oil which allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow for easier starting of the engine in cold weather.
• The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the viscosity characteristic of the oil when the oil is at high temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity (one with a higher value) may be better suited if the vehicle is operated at high speeds, or under extreme load conditions.

How to read oil container labels:

Either or both API registered marks are added to some oil containers to help you select the oil you should use.

① API Service Symbol

Top portion: "API SERVICE SN" means the oil quality designation by American Petroleum Institute (API).

Center portion: "SAE 0W-20" means the SAE viscosity grade. Lower portion: "Resource-Con-serving" means that the oil has fuel-saving and environmental protection capabilities.

② ILSAC Certification Mark

The International Lubricant Specification Advisory Committee (ILSAC) Certification Mark is displayed on the front of the container.

Cooling system

Capacity (reference)
Gasoline enginePower control unit	6.3 L (6.7 qt., 5.5 Imp. qt.)2.1 L (2.2 qt., 1.8 Imp. qt.)
Coolant type	Use either of the following:“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technologyDo not use plain water alone.

Ignition system

Spark plugMake DENSO SC16HR11 or DENSO SC20HR11
Gap 1.1 mm (0.043 in.)

NOTICE

■Iridium-tipped spark plugs

Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust the spark plug gap.

Electrical system

12-volt batteryOpen voltage at 20°C (68°F):	12.0 V or higherIf the voltage is lower than the standard value, charge the battery.(Voltage is checked 20 minutes after the hybrid system and all lights are turned off.)
Charging rates 5 A max.

Hybrid transmission

Fluid capacity*	3.4 L (3.6 qt., 3.0 Imp. qt.)
Fluid type Toyota Genuine ATF	WS

*: The fluid capacity is a reference quantity.
If replacement is necessary, contact your Toyota dealer.

NOTICE

■Transmission fluid type

Using transmission fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” may ultimately damage the transmission of your vehicle.

Brakes

Pedal clearance *1	83 mm (3.27 in.) Min.
Pedal free play	1 — 6 mm (0.04 — 0.24 in.)
Parking brake lever travel *2	6 — 9 clicks
Fluid type	SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1704 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 4

*1: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 294 N (30 kgf, 66 lbf) while the hybrid system is operating
*2: Parking brake lever travel when pulled up with a force of 200 N (20.4 kgf, 45.0 lbf)

Steering

Free play Less than 30 mm (1.2 in.)

Tires and wheels

Tire size 205/55R16 91V, T125/70D17 98M (compact spare)
Tire inflation pressure(Recommended cold tire inflation pressure)	Vehicle speed	Front wheel kPa (kgf/cm2 or bar, psi)	Rear wheel kPa (kgf/cm2 or bar, psi)
	More than 160 km/h (100 mph)	260 (2.6, 38) 260	(2.6, 38)
	160 km/h (100 mph) or less	230 (2.3, 33) 230	(2.3, 33)
Tire inflation pressure(compact spare)(Recommended cold tire inflation pressure)	420 kPa (4.2 kgf/cm2 or bar, 60 psi)
Wheel size	16 × 6 1/2 J (16-inch tires), 17 × 4 T (compact spare)
Wheel nut torque 103	N·m (10.5 kgf·m, 76 ft·lbf)

Light bulbs

	Light Bulbs W Type
Exterior	Front fog lights*	19	A
	Front turn signal lights 21 B
	Side turn signal lights 5 B
	Rear turn signal lights 21 C
	Stop lights 21 D
	Back-up lights 16 E
	Licence plate lights 5 E
Interior	Vanity lights 5 F
	Front interior lights/personal lights 8 E
	Rear personal lights 8 E
	Luggage compartment light 5 F

A: H16 halogen bulbs
C: Single end bulbs (amber)
E: Wedge base bulbs (clear)

*: If equipped

B: Wedge base bulbs (amber)
D: Single end bulbs (clear)
F: Double end bulbs

Fuel information

You must only use unleaded gasoline.

Select premium unleaded gasoline with a Research Octane Number of 95 or higher for optimum engine performance.

If this premium type cannot be obtained, you may temporarily use unleaded gasoline with a Research Octane Number as low as 91.

■Use of ethanol blended gasoline in a gasoline engine

Toyota allows the use of ethanol blended gasoline where the ethanol content is up to 10%. Make sure that the ethanol blended gasoline to be used has a Research Octane Number that follows the above.

If your engine knocks

• Consult your Toyota dealer.
• You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while accelerating or driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern.

NOTICE

■Notice on fuel quality

• Do not use improper fuels. If improper fuels are used, the engine will be damaged.
• Do not use leaded gasoline.
  Leaded gasoline will cause the three-way catalytic converter to lose its effectiveness and the emission control system to function improperly.
• Do not use the methanol blended gasoline such as M15, M85, M100. The use of gasoline containing methanol may cause engine damage or failure.

Customizable features

Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be personalized to your preferences. The settings of these features can be changed on the multi-information display or navigation/multimedia system screen, or at your Toyota dealer.

Customizing vehicle features

- Changing on the navigation/multimedia system screen (vehicles with a navigation/multimedia system)

Multimedia system with "CAR" button

1 Press the "SETUP" button.
2 Touch "Vehicle" on the "Setup" screen. Select the desired item.
Navigation/multimedia system with "APPS" button
1 Press the "APPS" button.
2 Touch "Setup" on the "Apps" screen.
3 Touch "Vehicle" on the "Setup" screen. Select the desired item.

Various settings can be changed. Refer to the list of settings that can be changed for details.

■ Changing on the multi-information display

→P. 87

Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions when customized. Contact your Toyota dealer for further details.

① Settings that can be changed on the navigation/multimedia system screen
② Settings that can be changed on the multi-information display
③ Settings that can be changed by your Toyota dealer. Definition of symbols: O = Available, — = Not available

■ Gauges, meters and multi-information display ( P. 82, 84)

Function*1	Default setting	Customized setting	123	○	○
EV Indicator	On(Self-lighting)	Off — O —
Units km (L/100 km) km (km/L) O O —
Drive information 1	Current fuel consumption	*3	— O —
	Average fuel economy (after reset)
Drive information 2	Distance(driving range)	*3	— O —
	Average vehicle speed (after reset)
Pop-up display*2	On Off —	O —

^*1 : For details about each function: P. 89
*2: If equipped
*3: 2 of the following items: current fuel consumption, average fuel economy (after reset), average fuel economy (after start), average fuel economy (after refuel), average vehicle speed (after reset), average vehicle speed (after start), elapsed time (after reset), elapsed time (after start), distance (driving range), distance (after start), blank.

■ Smart entry & start system and wireless remote control ( P. 101, 105, 110)

Function Default setting		Customized setting	123	○	○
Operation buzzer volume 7		Off	○	—	○
		1 to 6
Operation signal (Emergency flashers)	On Off O	—	—	—	—
Time elapsed before automatic door lock function is activated if door is not opened after being unlocked	30 seconds	60 seconds	—	—	○
		120 seconds
Open door warning buzzer	On Off —	—	—	—	—

■ Smart entry & start system ( P. 101, 105, 110)

Function Default setting		Customized setting	123	○	○
Smart entry & start system	On Off O	— O
Number of consecutive door lock operations	2 times	As many as desired	—	— O

■ Wireless remote control ( P. 98, 101, 105)

Function Default setting		Customized setting	123	○	○
Wireless remote control On	Off — — O

■ Reverse warning buzzer ( P. 153)

Function Default setting		Customized setting	123	○	○
Operation signals (Buzzer) when shifting into R	Beeps repeatedly	Beeps once — — O

■ Turn signal lever ( P. 157)

Function Default setting		Customized setting	123	○	○
The number of times the turn signal lights flash automatically when the turn signal lever is moved to the first position during a lane change	3	4	—	—	○
		5
		6
		7
		Off

■ LDA (Lane Departure Alert) ^* ( P. 190)

Function Default setting		Customized setting	123	○	○
LDA warning sensitivity	High	Standard	—	O	—

*: If equipped

■ Automatic air conditioning system ( P. 322)

Function Default setting	Customized setting	123	○	○
Switching between outside air and recirculated air mode linked to “AUTO” switch operation	On Off O — O

■ Illumination (→P. 330)

Function Default setting		Customized setting	123	○	○
Time elapsed before the interior lights turn off	15 seconds	7.5 seconds	—	—	○
		30 seconds
Operation after the power switch is turned off	On Off —	—	○
Operation when the doors are unlocked	On Off —	—	○
Operation when you approach the vehicle with the electronic key on your person	On Off —	—	○

Vehicle customization

When the doors remain closed after unlocking the doors and the timer activated automatic door lock function activates, signals will be generated in accordance with the operational signal (emergency flashers) function setting.

WARNING

During customization

As the hybrid system needs to be operating during customization, ensure that the vehicle is parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed area such as a garage, exhaust gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO) may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

NOTICE

During customization

To prevent 12-volt battery discharge, ensure that the hybrid system is operating while customizing features.

Not for Reproduction

Index

What to do if...

(Troubleshooting)......464

Alphabetical index......468

What to do if... (Troubleshooting)

If you have a problem, check the following before contacting your Toyota dealer.

The doors cannot be locked, unlocked, opened or closed

You lose your keys

• If you lose your mechanical keys, new genuine mechanical keys can be made by your Toyota dealer. (→P. 99)
• If you lose your electronic keys, the risk of vehicle theft increases significantly. Contact your Toyota dealer immediately. (→P. 100)

The doors cannot be locked or unlocked

● Is the key battery weak or depleted? (→P. 381)
● Is the power switch in ON mode?

When locking the doors, turn the power switch off. ( P. 144)

● Is the electronic key left inside the vehicle?

When locking the doors, make sure that you have the electronic key on your person.

● The function may not operate properly due to the condition of the radio wave. (→P. 99, 113)

The rear door cannot be opened

● Is the child-protector lock set?

The rear door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle when the lock is set. Open the rear door from outside and then unlock the child-protector lock. ( P. 104)

If you think something is wrong

The hybrid system does not start

• Did you press the power switch while firmly depressing the brake pedal? ( P. 142)
  ● Is the P shift position selected? ( P. 145)
  ● Is the electronic key anywhere detectable inside the vehicle? (→P. 111)
• Is the electronic key battery weak or depleted? In this case, the hybrid system can be started in a temporary way. (→P. 432)
  ● Is the 12-volt battery discharged? (→P. 433)

The windows do not open or close by operating the power window switches

● Is the window lock switch pressed?

The power window except for the one at the driver's seat cannot be operated if the window lock switch is pressed. ( P. 128)

The power switch is turned off automatically

- The auto power off function will be operated if the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY or ON mode (the hybrid system is not operating) for a period of time. (→P. 144)

A warning buzzer sounds during driving

● The seat belt reminder light is flashing Are the driver and the passenger wearing the seat belts? ( P. 408)
● The brake system warning light is on Is the parking brake released? (→P. 158)

Depending on the situation, other types of warning buzzer may also sound. ( P. 406, 411)

A warning buzzer sounds when leaving the vehicle

- Is the electronic key left inside the vehicle? Check the message on the multi-information display. (→P. 411)

A warning light turns on or a warning message is displayed

- When a warning light turns on or a warning message is displayed, refer to P. 406, 411.

When a problem has occurred

If you have a flat tire

- Stop the vehicle in a safe place and replace the flat tire with the spare tire. (→P. 419)

The vehicle becomes stuck

- Try the procedure for when the vehicle becomes stuck in mud, dirt, or snow. (→P. 442)

Alphabetical index

A

A/C....322

Air conditioning filter......379

ABS

(Anti-lock Brake System).....211

Warning light....407

Air conditioning filter ....379

Air conditioning

system....322

Air conditioning filter......379

Airbags ....34

Airbag operating conditions ....40

Airbag precautions for your child 36

Correct driving posture......28

Curtain shield airbag operating conditions ....41

Curtain shield airbag precautions....38

General airbag precautions.....36

Locations of airbags....34

Modification and disposal of airbags....39

Side airbag operating conditions ....41

Side airbag precautions......36

Side and curtain shield airbags operating conditions ....41

Side and curtain shield airbags precautions....36

SRS airbags....34

SRS warning light 407

Anchor fittings....53

Antennas (smart entry & start system)....110

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) 211

Warning light.... 407

Armrest.... 346

Assist grips.... 346

Audio input ^* 231

Audio system ^TM 226

Audio input.... 231

AUX port/USB port...... 231

Bluetooth ^® audio .....281

CD player....247

iPod....254

MP3/WMA disc 247

Optimal use....243

Portable music player .....266

Radio 245

Steering wheel audio switch ....230

USB memory 231

Automatic headlight leveling system.... 161

Automatic High Beam .....195

Auxiliary boxes...... 338, 340

B

Back door 105

Back-up lights

Replacing light bulb....387

Wattage....455

Battery (12-volt battery) .....368

Battery checking 368

If the 12-volt battery is discharged....433

Preparing and checking before winter....220

Battery (traction battery)......68

Bluetooth®*

Hands-free system (for cellular phone)......283

Multimedia system .....267

Bottle holders....336

Brake

Emergency brake signal .....212

Fluid 453

Parking brake....158

Warning light....406

Brake assist....211

Break-in tips ......133

Brightness control

Meter light control 86

C

Care....348, 351

Aluminum wheels....349

Exterior 348

Interior.... 351

Seat belts....352

Cargo hooks...... 339

CD player ^* 247

Chains....221

Child restraint system......45

Baby seats (infant seats), definition....45

Baby seats (infant seats), installation ....54

Child seats (convertible seats), definition....45

Child seats (convertible seats), installation ....55

Installing CRS with ISOFIX rigid anchors....58

Installing CRS with seat belts.... 54

Installing CRS with upper anchorage strap ....59

Junior seats (booster seats), definition....45

Junior seats (booster seats), installation ....57

Child safety 44

12-volt battery precautions....370, 437

Airbag precautions......36

Child restraint system .....45

How your child should wear the seat belt....31

Installing child restraints......53

Power window lock switch ....128

Power window precautions...130

Rear door child-protectors ....104

Removed electronic key battery precautions....382

Seat belt precautions ....33

Child-protectors......104

Cleaning....348, 351

Aluminum wheels....349

Exterior....348

Interior......351

Seat belts....352

Clock....344

Condenser....366

Console box 335

Cooling system....365

Hybrid system overheating....438

Cruise control ....199

Cup holders....337

Curtain shield airbags......34

Customizable features .....457

D

Daytime running light system.... 161

Defogger

Outside rear view mirrors..... 325

Rear window....325

Windshield 325

Dimensions 446

Display

Multi-information display ....84

Warning message ....411

Do-it-yourself maintenance ....356

Door lock

Back door.... 105

Side doors....101

Smart entry & start system.... 101, 105

Wireless remote control.....101

Doors

Back door.... 105

Door lock....101, 105

Door windows 128

Open door warning buzzer....104, 106

Outside rear view mirrors..... 126

Rear door child-protector.....104

Side doors....101

Drive information...... 87

Driving 132

Break-in tips.... 133

Correct posture......28

Hybrid vehicle driving tips.....217

Procedures 132

Winter drive tips....220

E

ECB (Electronically

Controlled Brake System) ....211

Eco drive mode....152

Electric motor

(traction motor)......64

Electric Power Steering

(EPS)......212

Warning light......407

Electronic key 98

Battery-saving function .....112

If the electronic key does not operate properly ....431

Replacing the battery......381

Electronically Controlled

Brake System (ECB)......211

Emergency, in case of

If a warning buzzer sounds....406

If a warning light turns on.....406

If a warning message is displayed ....411

If the 12-volt battery is discharged....433

If the electronic key does not operate properly ....431

If the hybrid system will not start....429

If you have a flat tire......419

If you think something is wrong....405

If your vehicle becomes stuck ....442

If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency...399

If your vehicle needs to be towed....400

If your vehicle overheats.....438

Emergency brake signal .....212

Emergency flashers ...... 398

Energy monitor....92

Engine......448

ACCESSORY mode .....144

Compartment...... 361

Engine switch.... 142

Hood 358

How to start the hybrid system ....142

Identification number ......447

If the hybrid system will not start ....429

Ignition switch (power switch) .....142

Overheating 438

Power switch.... 142

Engine coolant....365

Capacity....452

Checking....365

Preparing and checking before winter....220

Warning light 406

Engine oil 362

Capacity 449

Checking....362

Preparing and checking before winter....220

Engine switch 142

EPS

(Electric Power Steering).....212

Warning light 407

EV drive mode.... 147

F

Flat tire

Vehicles with a spare tire.....419

Floor mats 26

Fluid

Brake......453

Hybrid transmission .....453

Washer....367

Fog lights....163

Replacing light bulbs......387

Switch 163

Wattage....455

Front fog lights ....163

Replacing light bulbs......387

Switch 163

Wattage....455

Front personal lights......332

Wattage....455

Front position lights.....159

Light switch 159

Replacing light bulbs....387

Front seats 117

Adjustment......117

Cleaning....351

Correct driving posture......28

Head restraints....121

Front sensor....173

Front turn signal lights......157

Replacing light bulbs....387

Turn signal lever 157

Wattage....455

Fuel 168

Capacity....448

Fuel gauge....82

Information......456

Refueling....168

Type......448

Warning light....408

Fuel filler door......168

Refueling....168

Fuses 383

G

Gauges 82

Glove box 335

Grocery bag hooks......339

H

Hands-free system

(for cellular phone)* 267

Head restraints 121

Headlight cleaners.... 164

Headlights 159

Automatic High Beam system.... 195

Light switch.... 159

Replacing light bulbs......387

Wattage 455

Heaters

Air conditioning system...... 322

Outside rear view mirrors.....325

High voltage components......68

Hill-start assist control......211

Hood 358

Open....358

Hooks

Cargo hooks ....339

Grocery bag hooks ....339

Retaining hooks (floor mat).....26

Horn 123

Hybrid battery

(traction battery)......68

Hybrid battery

(traction battery) air vents.....69

Hybrid system....64

Emergency shut off system ....69

Energy monitor/consumption screen....91

EV drive mode ....147

High voltage components .....68

Hybrid System Indicator......83

Hybrid system precautions.....68

Hybrid vehicle driving tips.....217

If the hybrid system will not start....429

Overheating 438

Power (ignition) switch.....142

Starting the hybrid system ....142

Hybrid System Indicator .....83

Hybrid transmission......149

|

Identification 447

Engine....447

Vehicle 447

Ignition switch

(power switch) 142

Illuminated entry system......333

Immobilizer system ....75

Indicators......80

Initialization

Meter display settings .....89

Power windows....129

Inside rear view mirror .....125

Interior lights....330

ISOFIX rigid anchors ....53

J

Jack

Positioning the jack...... 360

Vehicle-equipped jack......420

Jack handle......420

Jam protection function

Power window....128

K

Keyless entry 110

Smart entry & start system....101, 105

Wireless remote control.....101

Keys......98

Battery-saving function .....112

Electronic key 98

If the electronic key does not operate properly ....431

If you lose your keys......99

Key number plate....98

Keyless entry 101, 105

Mechanical key....98

Power switch.... 142

Replacing the battery......381

Warning buzzer.... 111

Wireless remote control key...... 98

Knee airbags.... 34

L

Lane Departure Alert

(LDA)....190

LDA

(Lane Departure Alert) .....190

Lever

Auxiliary catch lever......358

Hood lock release lever .....358

Shift lever....149

Turn signal lever 157

Wiper lever......164, 166

License plate lights ....159

Light switch 159

Replacing light bulbs......387

Wattage....455

Light bulbs

Replacing....387

Wattage....455

Lights

Automatic High Beam system ....195

Fog light switch .....163

Headlight switch....159

Illuminated entry system.....333

Interior light 331

Interior lights list......330

Luggage compartment light....106

Personal lights 332

Replacing light bulbs....387

Turn signal lever 157

Vanity lights....331

Wattage....455

Luggage cover ....341

M

Maintenance

Do-it-yourself maintenance...356

Maintenance data ....446

Maintenance requirements ...354

Malfunction indicator lamp.....406

Master warning light...... 409

Meter 82

Indicators 80

Meter light control 86

Meters....82

Multi-information display 84

Warning lights....79

Meter light control 86

Mirrors

Inside rear view mirror ..... 125

Outside rear view mirrors..... 126

Vanity mirrors.... 343

MP3 disc ^* 247

Multi-information display......84

Drive information......87

LDA (Lane Departure Alert)......192

PCS (Pre-Collision System) 177, 180

Settings.... 89

Warning message.... 411

0

Odometer....86

Oil

Engine oil 449

Opener

Back door....105

Outside rear view mirrors .....126

Adjusting and folding......126

Outside temperature

display......82

Overheating, Hybrid system...438

P

Parking brake....158

Operation....158

Parking brake engaged warning buzzer.... 158

PCS

(Pre-Collision System)......177

PCS

(Pre-Collision System)...... 180

Warning light.... 408

Personal lights.... 332

Power control unit.... 68

Power control unit coolant .....365

Capacity 452

Checking....365

Preparing and checking before winter....220

Power outlets......345

Power steering...... 212

Warning light.... 407

Power switch.... 142

Power windows....128

Jam protection function...... 128

Operation....128

Window lock switch......128

Pre-Collision System

(PCS) 177

PCS

(Pre-Collision System)...... 180

Warning light.... 408

R

Radiator 366

Radio ^* 245

Rear personal lights ....332

Wattage....455

Rear seat

Folding down....119

Rear turn signal lights.....157

Replacing light bulbs......387

Turn signal lever 157

Wattage....455

Rear view mirror

Inside rear view mirror .....125

Outside rear view mirrors.....126

Rear view monitor system.....202

Rear window defogger .....325

Refueling ....168

Capacity....448

Fuel types 448

Opening the fuel tank cap.....170

Replacing

Electronic key battery......381

Fuses 383

Light bulbs....387

Tires....419

Road accident cautions .....72

S

Seat belt reminder light......408

Seat belts.... 30

Adjusting the seat belt 31

Child restraint system installation 54

Cleaning and maintaining the seat belt.... 352

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR).... 31

How to wear your seat belt.....28

How your child should wear the seat belt.... 31

Pregnant women, proper seat belt use....32

Reminder light and buzzer.... 408

Seat belt pretensioners......31

SRS warning light 407

Seats......117

Adjustment...... 117

Adjustment precautions .....118

Child seats/child restraint system installation....53

Cleaning....351

Head restraints 121

Properly sitting in the seat .....28

Sensor

Automatic headlight system....161

Automatic High Beam system....173

LDA (Lane Departure Alert)......190

PCS (Pre-Collision System) 173

Shift lever 149

Side airbags 34

Side mirrors ....126

Adjusting and folding .....126

Side turn signal lights .....157

Replacing light bulbs......387

Turn signal lever 157

Wattage....455

Smart entry & start system.....110

Antenna location ....110

Entry functions .....101, 105

Starting the engine....142

Snow tires....222

Spare tire 419

Inflation pressure .....454

Storage location......420

Spark plug 452

Specifications ......446

Speech command system\*

Speedometer....82

Steering wheel 123

Adjustment......123

Audio switches......230

Stop lights

Replacing light bulbs....387

Wattage....455

Storage feature ....334

Stuck

If the vehicle becomes

stuck 442

Sun visors ....343

Switches

Audio remote control switches ^* .....230

Cruise control switch.....199

Door lock switches.... 103

"ECO MODE" switch.....152

Emergency flashers switch...398

EV drive mode switch.....147

Fog light switch....163

Ignition switch 142

LDA (Lane Departure Alert) switch.... 192

Light switches 159

Meter control switches...... 87

Outside rear view mirror switches....126

P position switch....151

PCS (Pre-Collision System) switch .... 180

Power door lock switch.....103

Power switch.... 142

Power window switches.....128

"PWR MODE" switch .....152

Rear window defogger switch ....325

Talk switch ^* 299

Telephone switch ^* 299

"TRIP" switch 86

VSC OFF switch ..... 212, 213

Window lock switch.....128

Windshield wiper and washer switch....164, 166

T

Tail lights....159

Light switch 159

Replacing light bulbs......387

Talk switch ^* 299

Telephone switches* ......299

Theft deterrent system

Engine immobilizer system.....75

Tire inflation pressure......375

Maintenance data 454

Tires 372

Chains....221

Checking....372

If you have a flat tire......419

Inflation pressure 454

Replacing....419

Rotating tires....373

Size......454

Snow tires 222

Spare tire 419

Tools 420

Towing 400

Emergency towing 400

Towing eyelet......402

Trailer towing ....141

Toyota Safety Sense 171

Automatic High Beam...... 195

LDA

(Lane Departure Alert)......190

PCS

(Pre-Collision System)...... 177

Traction battery

(hybrid battery)....68

Traction Control (TRC)......211

Traction motor

(electric motor)......64

Trailer towing ....141

Transmission 149

TRC (Traction Control)...... 211

Trip information......86

Trip meters....86

Turn signal lights....157

Replacing light bulbs......387

Turn signal lever 157

Wattage 455

U

Upper anchorage strap ....59

USB port ^* 231

V

Vanity lights ....331

Wattage....455

Vanity mirrors ....343

Vehicle data recordings .....10

Vehicle identification number 447

Vehicle Stability Control (VSC)......211

VSC (Vehicle Stability Control).....211

W

Warning buzzers

Brake system ....406

Electric power steering system ....407

LDA (Lane Departure Alert)......190

Open door....104

Pre-collision warning.....177

Seat belt reminder....408

Warning lights....79

ABS....407

Brake system ....406

Electric power steering system ....407

High engine coolant temperature warning light...406

Low fuel level 408

Malfunction indicator lamp ....406

Master warning light......409

PCS warning light ....408

Seat belt reminder light.....408

Slip indicator ....407

SRS warning light 407

Warning messages......411

Washer.... 164, 166

Checking.... 367

Preparing and checking before winter....220

Switch 164, 166

Washing and waxing......348

Wheels.... 377

Replacing.... 377

Size....454

Window glasses....128

Window lock switch 128

Windows....128

Power windows....128

Rear window defogger......325

Windshield wipers...... 164, 166

Intermittent wiper with interval adjuster....164

Winter driving tips......220

Wireless remote control key.....98

Battery-saving function ..... 112

Locking/Unlocking...... 101

Replacing the battery......381

WMA disc ^* 247

GAS STATION INFORMATION

Auxiliary catch lever Fuel filler door

P. 358 P. 170

Side profile line drawing of a car with visible door, windows, and side panels (no text or symbols)

CTHPIAP193

Hood lock release lever

Fuel filler door opener

Tire inflation pressure

P. 358 P. 170 P. 454

Fuel tank capacity (Reference)	45 L (11.9 gal., 9.9 Imp. gal.)
Fuel type Unleaded gasoline only P. 448
Cold tire inflation pressure	P. 454
Engine oil capacity (Drain and refill — reference)	P. 449
Engine oil type	“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent P. 449

TOYOTA